Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment Act (B-BBEE Act)
Act 53 of 2003
Provides the empowerment-compliance context often used in public-sector supplier evaluation.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Documents available on tender detail page
Tender Type
Request for Bid(Open-Tender)
Delivery Location
Kusile Power Station project - - eMalahleni -
Organization Type
GOVERNMENT
Published
17 Jun 2026
OCDS Reference
ocds-9t57fa-159324
Date & Time
Tuesday, 07 July 2026 - 10:00
Venue
MS Teams
Tenders are to be submitted electronically via ESKOM e- tendering site by the stipulated closing date and time. Tender documents must be downloaded from the ESKOM tender bulletin.
Categories
Request for Bid(Open-Tender)
Kusile Power Station project - - eMalahleni -
17 Jun
2026
Tender Published
Tender was published
07 Jul
2026
Closing Date
Tender closing date
These references help suppliers understand the public-procurement framework around this opportunity. They are generated from the tender category, issuing organisation type and procurement context.
Annexure O - Safety.zip
Median Estimate
R 355 178
Range
Based on 16 comparable awarded tenders. Companies with similar profiles typically bid near the median.
* Estimates are based on historical data and do not guarantee actual award values.
Learn how to submit a winning bid with these related articles
Everything South African construction contractors need to know about how procurement officers verify cidb grades: what gauteng contractors must ensure is correct — april 2026 update — covering CIDB grading certificate, NHBRC registration (residential), step-by-step processes, common disqualification mistakes, and how Tenders-SA.org helps you find and win relevant contracts in Gauteng.
Everything South African construction contractors need to know about cidb grading system explained: what every gauteng contractor must know in 2026 — april 2026 update — covering CIDB grading certificate, NHBRC registration (residential), step-by-step processes, common disqualification mistakes, and how Tenders-SA.org helps you find and win relevant contracts in Gauteng.
Everything South African construction contractors need to know about cidb vs nhbrc: understanding dual registration requirements for residential projects in gauteng — april 2026 update — covering CIDB grading certificate, NHBRC registration (residential), step-by-step processes, common disqualification mistakes, and how Tenders-SA.org helps you find and win relevant contracts in Gauteng.
Everything South African construction contractors need to know about cidb grading system explained: what every gauteng contractor must know in 2026 — april 2026 update — covering CIDB grading certificate, NHBRC registration (residential), step-by-step processes, common disqualification mistakes, and how Tenders-SA.org helps you find and win relevant contracts in Gauteng.
💡 Want more tendering tips and strategies?
Explore Our BlogTenders in this industry often require registration with these bodies.
Construction Industry Development Board (CIDB) registration is mandatory for almost all public sector construction tenders. Ensure your grading matches the tender value.
Recommended Certifications
Having these can improve your winning chances: NHBRC Registration, ISO 9001:2015 (Quality Management), ISO 14001:2015 (Environmental Management), ISO 45001:2018 (Occupational Health & Safety), SACPCMP Registration, ECSA Registration
AI Document Analysis Stages
We refine every tender document through these stages so you can brief your team and prepare your bid with confidence. Anything marked as "in progress" will be upgraded automatically — no action required from you.
Description
Source: Annexure O - Safety.zipProject
Title: Kusile SHE Specification Document Identifier: 240-143052367
Alternative Reference N/A
Number:
Area of Applicability: Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd
Functional Area: Safety, Health, and
Environment
Revision: 08
Total Pages: 61
Next Review Date: July 2028
Disclosure Controlled Disclosure
Classification:
Compiled by Supported by Functional Authorized by
Responsibility
A Rhode S Mahlangu F Durand Z Shange
Safety Manager Environmental Middle Manager General Manager
Manager SHE
Date: 31.07.205 Date: 31/07/2025 Date: 31/07/2025 Date: 2025/08/13
File name: 240-143052367 ~ Kusile SHE Specification Rev. 8
Template ID: 32-4 (Rev 12) Document template (for procedures, manuals, standards, instructions, etc.
Formatted by: EDC_TLN_17.03.2021 (Document Controller to update)
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
Content . Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 5
2. Supporting Clauses .................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.2 Applicability ........................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Effective Date ........................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Normative/Informative References ................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Normative .............................................................................................................. 5
2.2.2 Informative............................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Definitions ........................................................................................................................ 6
2.4 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 8
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities ............................................................................................... 9
2.5.1 Contractual and Legal Roles & Responsibilities ..................................................... 9
2.5.2 KET SHE Manager .............................................................................................. 10
2.5.3 KET Senior Contracts Manager/Employer’s Representative ................................ 10
2.5.4 Contracts Manager/Employer’ Representative ..................................................... 10
2.5.5 KET Team ........................................................................................................... 11
2.5.6 Engineer .............................................................................................................. 11
2.6 Process for Monitoring .................................................................................................... 11
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents ...................................................................................... 11
3. Document Content .................................................................................................................. 11
3.1 Employer’s Lifesaving Rules ........................................................................................... 11
3.2 General Requirements ................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Contractor’s SHE Policy and Plan .................................................................................. 14
3.3.1 SHE Plan Requirements ...................................................................................... 15
3.4 Appointments and Supervision ....................................................................................... 16
3.5 Induction and Training .................................................................................................... 21
3.6 Occupational Health, Rehabilitation and Hygiene ........................................................... 23
3.6.1 Compensation for Occupational Injuries and Diseases ........................................ 23
3.6.2 Employee Health and Wellness Programme........................................................ 23
3.6.3 Occupational Hygiene ......................................................................................... 24
3.6.4 Medical Surveillance Programme ........................................................................ 25
3.6.5 Emergency Care ................................................................................................. 26
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response ...................................................................... 26
3.7.1 Emergency Response Plan ................................................................................. 26
3.7.2 Fire Safety ........................................................................................................... 27
3.7.3 Fire Safety Plan ................................................................................................... 27
3.7.4 Fire System Impairment....................................................................................... 28
3.8 Work Stoppage............................................................................................................... 28
3.9 Hazard and Risk Management ....................................................................................... 30
3.9.1 Hazard and Risk Management ............................................................................ 30
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
3.9.2 Specific Health and Safety Hazards .................................................................... 30
3.10 Kusile Power Station General Health Safety and Security Rules .................................... 31
3.11 Incident Investigation ...................................................................................................... 32
3.12 Reporting and Meetings ................................................................................................. 33
3.12.1 Record Keeping ................................................................................................... 34
3.13 Employee Engagement and Behaviour Based Safety..................................................... 34
3.14 Audits ............................................................................................................................. 35
3.14.1 Approval and Compliance of the Contractor SHE Plan ........................................ 35
3.14.2 Contractor Approval and Compliance .................................................................. 35
3.14.3 Contractor SHE Performance Evaluation Compliance ......................................... 36
3.14.4 Internal Audits ..................................................................................................... 36
3.14.5 Third Party Legal Compliance Verification Audits ................................................ 36
3.14.6 Site Inspections by Contractors’ Management ..................................................... 36
3.15 Permit to Work System (PTW) ........................................................................................ 37
3.16 Work Co-ordination Process ........................................................................................... 41
3.17 Construction Vehicles & Mobile Plant ............................................................................. 43
3.18 Housekeeping ................................................................................................................ 47
3.19 Signage .......................................................................................................................... 48
3.20 Compressed Gas Cylinders ............................................................................................ 49
3.21 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) ............................................................................ 50
3.22 Machinery, Tools and Equipment ................................................................................... 51
3.23 Hand Tools and Pneumatic Tools ................................................................................... 52
3.24 Portable Electric Tools .................................................................................................... 53
3.25 Portable Electric Tools .................................................................................................... 54
3.26 Lifting Machines and Lifting Tackle ................................................................................. 54
3.27 Work at Elevated Positions ............................................................................................. 57
3.28 Scaffolding ..................................................................................................................... 59
3.29 Ladders (Portable) .......................................................................................................... 59
3.30 Barricading ..................................................................................................................... 60
3.31 Permit to Work................................................................................................................ 60
3.32 Radiography, Ultrasonic, Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) ............................................... 61
3.33 Trenching and Excavations ............................................................................................ 62
3.34 Working near Public Roads ............................................................................................ 64
3.35 Confined Space Entry Procedure ................................................................................... 64
3.36 Steel Erection ................................................................................................................. 66
3.37 Stacking and Storage ..................................................................................................... 68
3.38 Severe Weather ............................................................................................................. 69
3.39 Environmental Management ........................................................................................... 70
3.39.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................ 70
3.39.2 Site Establishment and Management .................................................................. 70
3.39.3 Fauna and Flora .................................................................................................. 70
3.39.4 Herbicides ........................................................................................................... 71
3.39.5 Hazardous Materials/Chemicals Management ..................................................... 71
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
3.39.6 Storage of Hazardous Substances ...................................................................... 72
3.39.7 Flammable and Combustible Materials ................................................................ 73
3.39.8 Explosives ........................................................................................................... 74
3.39.9 Water Management ............................................................................................. 74
3.39.10 Rehabilitation ..................................................................................................... 75
3.39.11 Fire Hazards ...................................................................................................... 75
3.39.12 Air, Dust and Noise Management ...................................................................... 75
3.39.13 Environmental Incidents .................................................................................... 76
3.39.14 Basic Hazard Identification ................................................................................ 76
3.39.15 Environmental Hazards ..................................................................................... 76
3.40 Construction Hazards ..................................................................................................... 77
3.41 Kusile Safety, Health, Environment and Quality Statement of Commitment .................... 78
3.42 Contractors Site Facilities ............................................................................................... 78
4. Acceptance ............................................................................................................................. 78
5. Revisions ................................................................................................................................ 78
6. Development Team ................................................................................................................ 80
7. Acknowledgements ................................................................................................................ 80
8. Appendices ............................................................................................................................. 80
Appendix A – Colour Code Index for Electrical Equipment and Lifting Tackle ............................... 81
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
In terms of Occupational Health and Safety Act (Construction Regulations 5(1)(b)) the
client is required to develop and issue a SHE specification to its Contractors.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
This specification sets out the minimum legislative and organisational requirements for works at
Kusile Power Station Project.
2.1.1 Purpose
All contractors are required to execute their works in accordance with this specification as well as
other legal document.
2.1.2 Applicability
This specification is applicable to all Principal Contractors, Contractors, Service Providers, Suppliers
and all the activities and processes carried out for and on behalf of Kusile Power Station Project. This
document shall apply throughout Kusile Power Station Project.
2.1.3 Effective Date
This specification shall be implemented from date of authorization and or contractors award.
2.2 Normative/Informative References
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] 32-727 : Safety, Health, Environment and Quality Policy
[2] 240-130092553 : Kusile SHEQ statement of commitment
[3] ISO 45001 : Health and Safety Management Systems Requirements
[4] ISO 9001 : Quality Management Systems
[5] ISO 9001 : 2015 Quality Management Systems Requirements
[6] ISO 14001 : 2015 Environmental Management Systems Specification with guidance
[7] 32-136 : Contractor Health and Safety Requirements
[8] 32-95 : Occupational Health and Safety Incident Management procedure
[8] 240-131838225 : Eskom Occupational Health and safety Incident Management Definitions
and Classification Parameter
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
[9] 32-520 : Eskom Occupational Health and Safety Risk Assessment Procedure
[10] 240-62196227 : Life-saving Rules Standard
[11] 240-126456962 : Waste Management Plan
[12] 240-62946386 : Vehicle & Driver Safety Management Procedure
[13] 32-37 : Substance Abuse
[14] 32-124 : Eskom Fire Risk Management
[15] 32-418 : Working from Heights Procedure
[16] 240-133087117 : Eskom Environmental Incident Management Procedure
[17] 32-93 : Eskom Vehicle and Driver Safety Management
[18] 240-43848327 : Employees’ right of refusal to work in an unsafe situation
[19] 32-123 : Emergency Planning
[20] 32-726 : SHE Requirements for the Eskom Commercial Process
[21] 39-98 : Safe use of Lifting Machines and Lifting Tackle
[22] All remaining sections of Section 4, Employees Policies and Procedures of the Contract
[23] Relevant SANS codes as promulgated under section 44 of the Occupational Health and Safety
act
[24] 240-128446322 : Kusile Access Control Work Instruction
[25] 32-524 : Developing a SHE Specification
2.2.2 Informative
[26] Occupational Health and Safety Act and regulations Ac No
[27] Protection of Personal Information Act /2013
[28] Promotion of Access to Information Act
[29] National Environmental Management Act No
[30] National Environmental Management Waste Act .
2.3 Definitions
Definition Explanation
Abnormal Change from a normal working condition
Means a competent person who acts as a representative for a client
Agent
and registered with SACPCMP.
(32-520) baseline operational risks refer to the health and safety
Baseline Risk Assessment risks associated with all standard processes and routine activities in
the business.
Client Any person for whom construction work is being performed.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
Means any person having the knowledge, training, experience, and
qualifications, specific to the work or task being performed, provided
that, where appropriate qualifications and training are registered in
Competent Person terms of the South African Qualifications Authority Act, 1995 (Act No.
), those qualifications and training must be regarded as
the required qualifications and training and is familiar with the Act
and with the applicable regulations made under the Act.
Means an employer as defined in section 1 of the Act who performs
construction work and includes principal contractors. In relation to
Contractor: this document, where the word “contractor” is used, it will mean all
or some of the following: principal contractors, appointed contractors,
suppliers, vendors, service providers and consultants.
Means any work in connection with:
a) The construction, erection, alteration, renovation, repair,
demolition or dismantling of, or addition to, Building or any
similar structure.
Construction Work: b) The construction, erection, maintenance, demolition or
dismantling of any bridge, dam, canal, road, railway, runaway,
sewer, or water reticulation system, or the moving of earth,
clearing of land, the making of excavation, piling or any similar
civil engineering structure or type of work.
Means a workplace where construction w o r k i s b e i n g
Construction site
performed
Means any of the following persons: A competent person who:
a. Person who prepares a design
b. Person who checks and approves a design
c. Person who arranges for any person at work under his/her
control to prepare a design, including an employee of that
person where he or she is the employer, or designs temporary
Designer work, including its components,
d. An architect or engineer contributing to, or having overall
responsibility for, the design
e. A Building service engineer designing details for fixed plant
f. A Surveyor specifying articles or drawing up specifications
A Contractor carrying out design works as part of a design and build
project, or an interior designer, shopfitter, or landscape architect.
Contracts
Manager/Employer’s Employer’s representative (FIDIC Engineer)
representative
Eskom requirements which evolve from directives, policies,
Eskom Requirements: standards, procedures, specifications, work instructions, guidelines,
or manuals.
Means a documented plan which includes and provides for:
a) All risks relating to working from a fall risk position,
Fall Protection Plan: considering the nature of work undertaken,
b) The procedures and methods to be applied to eliminate the risk
of falling, and a rescue plan and procedures
Hazard Means a source of, or exposure to danger
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
Means the identification and documenting of existing or expected
hazards to the health and safety of persons, which are normally
Annexure B: Acknowledgement Form for Eskom OHS legal and other requirements
Important Dates
Source: Annexure O - Safety.zip (unknown){"briefingSession":"{\"date\":null,\"time\":null,\"venue\":\"ion Process ........................................................................................... 41\",\"is_compulsory\":false}"}
Evaluation Criteria
Source: Annexure O - Safety.zip (unknown)3.14.3 Contractor SHE Performance Evaluation Compliance ......................................... 36
3.41 Kusile Safety, Health, Environment and Quality Statement of Commitment .................... 78
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure O - Safety.zip (unknown)Project
Title: Kusile SHE Specification Document Identifier: 240-143052367
Alternative Reference N/A
Number:
Area of Applicability: Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd
Functional Area: Safety, Health, and
Environment
Revision: 08
Total Pages: 61
Next Review Date: July 2028
Disclosure Controlled Disclosure
Classification:
Compiled by Supported by Functional Authorized by
Responsibility
A Rhode S Mahlangu F Durand Z Shange
Safety Manager Environmental Middle Manager General Manager
Manager SHE
Date: 31.07.205 Date: 31/07/2025 Date: 31/07/2025 Date: 2025/08/13
File name: 240-143052367 ~ Kusile SHE Specification Rev. 8
Template ID: 32-4 (Rev 12) Document template (for procedures, manuals, standards, instructions, etc.
Formatted by: EDC_TLN_17.03.2021 (Document Controller to update)
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
Content . Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 5
2. Supporting Clauses .................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.2 Applicability ........................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Effective Date ........................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Normative/Informative References ................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Normative .............................................................................................................. 5
2.2.2 Informative............................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Definitions ........................................................................................................................ 6
2.4 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 8
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities ............................................................................................... 9
2.5.1 Contractual and Legal Roles & Responsibilities ..................................................... 9
2.5.2 KET SHE Manager .............................................................................................. 10
2.5.3 KET Senior Contracts Manager/Employer’s Representative ................................ 10
2.5.4 Contracts Manager/Employer’ Representative ..................................................... 10
2.5.5 KET Team ........................................................................................................... 11
2.5.6 Engineer .............................................................................................................. 11
2.6 Process for Monitoring .................................................................................................... 11
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents ...................................................................................... 11
3. Document Content .................................................................................................................. 11
3.1 Employer’s Lifesaving Rules ........................................................................................... 11
3.2 General Requirements ................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Contractor’s SHE Policy and Plan .................................................................................. 14
3.3.1 SHE Plan Requirements ...................................................................................... 15
3.4 Appointments and Supervision ....................................................................................... 16
3.5 Induction and Training .................................................................................................... 21
3.6 Occupational Health, Rehabilitation and Hygiene ........................................................... 23
3.6.1 Compensation for Occupational Injuries and Diseases ........................................ 23
3.6.2 Employee Health and Wellness Programme........................................................ 23
3.6.3 Occupational Hygiene ......................................................................................... 24
3.6.4 Medical Surveillance Programme ........................................................................ 25
3.6.5 Emergency Care ................................................................................................. 26
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response ...................................................................... 26
3.7.1 Emergency Response Plan ................................................................................. 26
3.7.2 Fire Safety ........................................................................................................... 27
3.7.3 Fire Safety Plan ................................................................................................... 27
3.7.4 Fire System Impairment....................................................................................... 28
3.8 Work Stoppage............................................................................................................... 28
3.9 Hazard and Risk Management ....................................................................................... 30
3.9.1 Hazard and Risk Management ............................................................................ 30
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
3.9.2 Specific Health and Safety Hazards .................................................................... 30
3.10 Kusile Power Station General Health Safety and Security Rules .................................... 31
3.11 Incident Investigation ...................................................................................................... 32
3.12 Reporting and Meetings ................................................................................................. 33
3.12.1 Record Keeping ................................................................................................... 34
3.13 Employee Engagement and Behaviour Based Safety..................................................... 34
3.14 Audits ............................................................................................................................. 35
3.14.1 Approval and Compliance of the Contractor SHE Plan ........................................ 35
3.14.2 Contractor Approval and Compliance .................................................................. 35
3.14.3 Contractor SHE Performance Evaluation Compliance ......................................... 36
3.14.4 Internal Audits ..................................................................................................... 36
3.14.5 Third Party Legal Compliance Verification Audits ................................................ 36
3.14.6 Site Inspections by Contractors’ Management ..................................................... 36
3.15 Permit to Work System (PTW) ........................................................................................ 37
3.16 Work Co-ordination Process ........................................................................................... 41
3.17 Construction Vehicles & Mobile Plant ............................................................................. 43
3.18 Housekeeping ................................................................................................................ 47
3.19 Signage .......................................................................................................................... 48
3.20 Compressed Gas Cylinders ............................................................................................ 49
3.21 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) ............................................................................ 50
3.22 Machinery, Tools and Equipment ................................................................................... 51
3.23 Hand Tools and Pneumatic Tools ................................................................................... 52
3.24 Portable Electric Tools .................................................................................................... 53
3.25 Portable Electric Tools .................................................................................................... 54
3.26 Lifting Machines and Lifting Tackle ................................................................................. 54
3.27 Work at Elevated Positions ............................................................................................. 57
3.28 Scaffolding ..................................................................................................................... 59
3.29 Ladders (Portable) .......................................................................................................... 59
3.30 Barricading ..................................................................................................................... 60
3.31 Permit to Work................................................................................................................ 60
3.32 Radiography, Ultrasonic, Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) ............................................... 61
3.33 Trenching and Excavations ............................................................................................ 62
3.34 Working near Public Roads ............................................................................................ 64
3.35 Confined Space Entry Procedure ................................................................................... 64
3.36 Steel Erection ................................................................................................................. 66
3.37 Stacking and Storage ..................................................................................................... 68
3.38 Severe Weather ............................................................................................................. 69
3.39 Environmental Management ........................................................................................... 70
3.39.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................ 70
3.39.2 Site Establishment and Management .................................................................. 70
3.39.3 Fauna and Flora .................................................................................................. 70
3.39.4 Herbicides ........................................................................................................... 71
3.39.5 Hazardous Materials/Chemicals Management ..................................................... 71
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
3.39.6 Storage of Hazardous Substances ...................................................................... 72
3.39.7 Flammable and Combustible Materials ................................................................ 73
3.39.8 Explosives ........................................................................................................... 74
3.39.9 Water Management ............................................................................................. 74
3.39.10 Rehabilitation ..................................................................................................... 75
3.39.11 Fire Hazards ...................................................................................................... 75
3.39.12 Air, Dust and Noise Management ...................................................................... 75
3.39.13 Environmental Incidents .................................................................................... 76
3.39.14 Basic Hazard Identification ................................................................................ 76
3.39.15 Environmental Hazards ..................................................................................... 76
3.40 Construction Hazards ..................................................................................................... 77
3.41 Kusile Safety, Health, Environment and Quality Statement of Commitment .................... 78
3.42 Contractors Site Facilities ............................................................................................... 78
4. Acceptance ............................................................................................................................. 78
5. Revisions ................................................................................................................................ 78
6. Development Team ................................................................................................................ 80
7. Acknowledgements ................................................................................................................ 80
8. Appendices ............................................................................................................................. 80
Appendix A – Colour Code Index for Electrical Equipment and Lifting Tackle ............................... 81
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
In terms of Occupational Health and Safety Act (Construction Regulations 5(1)(b)) the
client is required to develop and issue a SHE specification to its Contractors.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
This specification sets out the minimum legislative and organisational requirements for works at
Kusile Power Station Project.
2.1.1 Purpose
All contractors are required to execute their works in accordance with this specification as well as
other legal document.
2.1.2 Applicability
This specification is applicable to all Principal Contractors, Contractors, Service Providers, Suppliers
and all the activities and processes carried out for and on behalf of Kusile Power Station Project. This
document shall apply throughout Kusile Power Station Project.
2.1.3 Effective Date
This specification shall be implemented from date of authorization and or contractors award.
2.2 Normative/Informative References
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] 32-727 : Safety, Health, Environment and Quality Policy
[2] 240-130092553 : Kusile SHEQ statement of commitment
[3] ISO 45001 : Health and Safety Management Systems Requirements
[4] ISO 9001 : Quality Management Systems
[5] ISO 9001 : 2015 Quality Management Systems Requirements
[6] ISO 14001 : 2015 Environmental Management Systems Specification with guidance
[7] 32-136 : Contractor Health and Safety Requirements
[8] 32-95 : Occupational Health and Safety Incident Management procedure
[8] 240-131838225 : Eskom Occupational Health and safety Incident Management Definitions
and Classification Parameter
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
[9] 32-520 : Eskom Occupational Health and Safety Risk Assessment Procedure
[10] 240-62196227 : Life-saving Rules Standard
[11] 240-126456962 : Waste Management Plan
[12] 240-62946386 : Vehicle & Driver Safety Management Procedure
[13] 32-37 : Substance Abuse
[14] 32-124 : Eskom Fire Risk Management
[15] 32-418 : Working from Heights Procedure
[16] 240-133087117 : Eskom Environmental Incident Management Procedure
[17] 32-93 : Eskom Vehicle and Driver Safety Management
[18] 240-43848327 : Employees’ right of refusal to work in an unsafe situation
[19] 32-123 : Emergency Planning
[20] 32-726 : SHE Requirements for the Eskom Commercial Process
[21] 39-98 : Safe use of Lifting Machines and Lifting Tackle
[22] All remaining sections of Section 4, Employees Policies and Procedures of the Contract
[23] Relevant SANS codes as promulgated under section 44 of the Occupational Health and Safety
act
[24] 240-128446322 : Kusile Access Control Work Instruction
[25] 32-524 : Developing a SHE Specification
2.2.2 Informative
[26] Occupational Health and Safety Act and regulations Ac No
[27] Protection of Personal Information Act /2013
[28] Promotion of Access to Information Act
[29] National Environmental Management Act No
[30] National Environmental Management Waste Act .
2.3 Definitions
Definition Explanation
Abnormal Change from a normal working condition
Means a competent person who acts as a representative for a client
Agent
and registered with SACPCMP.
(32-520) baseline operational risks refer to the health and safety
Baseline Risk Assessment risks associated with all standard processes and routine activities in
the business.
Client Any person for whom construction work is being performed.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
Means any person having the knowledge, training, experience, and
qualifications, specific to the work or task being performed, provided
that, where appropriate qualifications and training are registered in
Competent Person terms of the South African Qualifications Authority Act, 1995 (Act No.
), those qualifications and training must be regarded as
the required qualifications and training and is familiar with the Act
and with the applicable regulations made under the Act.
Means an employer as defined in section 1 of the Act who performs
construction work and includes principal contractors. In relation to
Contractor: this document, where the word “contractor” is used, it will mean all
or some of the following: principal contractors, appointed contractors,
suppliers, vendors, service providers and consultants.
Means any work in connection with:
a) The construction, erection, alteration, renovation, repair,
demolition or dismantling of, or addition to, Building or any
similar structure.
Construction Work: b) The construction, erection, maintenance, demolition or
dismantling of any bridge, dam, canal, road, railway, runaway,
sewer, or water reticulation system, or the moving of earth,
clearing of land, the making of excavation, piling or any similar
civil engineering structure or type of work.
Means a workplace where construction w o r k i s b e i n g
Construction site
performed
Means any of the following persons: A competent person who:
a. Person who prepares a design
b. Person who checks and approves a design
c. Person who arranges for any person at work under his/her
control to prepare a design, including an employee of that
person where he or she is the employer, or designs temporary
Designer work, including its components,
d. An architect or engineer contributing to, or having overall
responsibility for, the design
e. A Building service engineer designing details for fixed plant
f. A Surveyor specifying articles or drawing up specifications
A Contractor carrying out design works as part of a design and build
project, or an interior designer, shopfitter, or landscape architect.
Contracts
Manager/Employer’s Employer’s representative (FIDIC Engineer)
representative
Eskom requirements which evolve from directives, policies,
Eskom Requirements: standards, procedures, specifications, work instructions, guidelines,
or manuals.
Means a documented plan which includes and provides for:
a) All risks relating to working from a fall risk position,
Fall Protection Plan: considering the nature of work undertaken,
b) The procedures and methods to be applied to eliminate the risk
of falling, and a rescue plan and procedures
Hazard Means a source of, or exposure to danger
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Kusile SHE Specification Unique Identifier: 240-143052367
Revision: 08
Page:
Means the identification and documenting of existing or expected
hazards to the health and safety of persons, which are normally
Annexure B: Acknowledgement Form for Eskom OHS legal and other requirements
Compliance Requirements
Source: Annexure O - Safety.zip (unknown)proof of experience
Appointment letters and competency certificates of the persons appointed as Construction
appointment letter, a Curriculum Vitae, and relevant certificates of
Insufficient searchable text - AI extraction recommended
Section
Source: Annexure O - Safety.zip3.14.3 Contractor SHE Performance Evaluation Compliance ......................................... 36
3.41 Kusile Safety, Health, Environment and Quality Statement of Commitment .................... 78
These rules commonly apply to South African public-sector procurement.
Act 53 of 2003
Provides the empowerment-compliance context often used in public-sector supplier evaluation.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 108 of 1996 (s217)
Sets the constitutional standard for fair, equitable, transparent, competitive and cost-effective public procurement.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 5 of 2000
Covers preferential procurement and preference-point systems used in public tenders.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 12 of 2004
Supports anti-corruption controls and supplier integrity in procurement processes.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 28 of 2024
Provides the national framework for public procurement across government.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 2 of 2000
Supports access to tender records, award decisions and public-sector procurement information.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 3 of 2000
Supports lawful, reasonable and procedurally fair administrative tender decisions.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
These rules are linked to the work category, industry, or regulated service area.
Act 38 of 2000
Important for public-sector construction and infrastructure tenders that require contractor grading or construction procurement standards.
Relevant because this tender appears to involve construction, building work, infrastructure, or site-based delivery.
Act 107 of 1998
This is general procurement context, not legal advice. Always verify requirements in the official tender documents and issuing authority notices.
Annexure L - Scope of Work and Technical Evaluation Criteria.zip
Annexure N - Pricing Schedule.zip
Annexure M - NEC.zip
Annexure G - SBD 6.2 Declaration Certificate for Local Production and Local Content.zip
Annexure Q - SDL&I Strategy.zip
Annexure R - Tax Evaluation Questionnaire.zip
Annexure K - E-tendering Help Manual acknowledgement form.zip
Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station.pdf
Annexure P - Quality.zip
To download these documents and access AI-powered analysis, visit the main tender page.
Organization
EskomContact Person
Dhiren Jingoo
Phone
031-710-5290
[email protected]
Address
Kusile Power Station project - - eMalahleni -
Source confidence
High source confidence
Official source
eTenders.gov.za
Documents found
10
Last checked
17 Jun 2026
AI status
Not enhanced
This tender has strong source evidence, including source metadata and supporting tender information synced from the government tender portal.
Tenders SA is not the issuing authority. All tenders are automatically synced from the official government tender portal. Always confirm final submission details, closing dates, briefing sessions, eligibility requirements, and documents on the official government portal before applying.
Eskom is South Africa's primary electricity supplier, managing generation, transmission, and distribution.
Description
Source: Annexure N - Pricing Schedule.zipCell C3: SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF DE GRIT SUMP SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS FOR ESKOM KUSILE POWER STATION
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure N - Pricing Schedule.zip (unknown)Cell C3: SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF DE GRIT SUMP SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS FOR ESKOM KUSILE POWER STATION
Compliance Requirements
Source: Annexure N - Pricing Schedule.zip (unknown)No specific requirements found
Description
Source: Annexure L - Scope of Work and Technical Evaluation Criteria.zipAlternative Reference Number: N/A
Area of Applicability: Engineering
Documentation Type: Specification
Revision: 02
Total Pages: 9
Next Review Date: N/A
Disclosure Classification: CONTROLLED
Disclosure
Compiled by Functional Responsibility Authorised by
......................................... ......................................... .........................................
T. Malwandla Chris Odendaal Tumiso Railo
Mechanical Engineer Lead Discipline Engineer Project Engineering Manager
Kusile Civil & Structural Kusile Low Pressure Kusile Project
Engineering Services
10/03/2026 06/03/2026Date: .................................24.02.2026 Date: ................................. Date: .................................
Supported by
.........................................
Yuvir Gokul
Engineer Design Work Lead
Kusile Project
06/03/2026Date: .................................
Kusile De-grit Sump Submersible Pumps Technical Unique Identifier: 366-541798
Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Table of contents
1 introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
2 supporting clauses ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Scope ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Purpose ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Applicability ......................................................................................................................................... 3
Normative/informative references ................................................................................................... 3
Normative ............................................................................................................................................ 3
Informative .......................................................................................................................................... 3
Definitions ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Abbreviations............................................................................................................................................... 4
Roles and responsibilities ..................................................................................................................... 4
Process for monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 4
Related/supporting documents .......................................................................................................... 4
3 engineering and contractor’s design.................................................................................................. 5
Description of works/ works information .................................................................................... 5
General ............................................................................................................................................... 5
Scope of Supply .................................................................................................................................. 5
Performance and Design Requirements ............................................................................................. 5
Drawings and Data.............................................................................................................................. 6
Motor Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 6
Other Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 6
Test Requirements .............................................................................................................................. 6
4 authorisation ................................................................................................................................................... 6
5 revisions ............................................................................................................................................................. 7
6 development team .......................................................................................................................................... 7
Appendix a : employer’s documents for the works ............................................................................. 8
Appendix b – ESKOM standards and guidelines ....................................................................................... 9
List of tables
Table 1: Table of Definitions ......................................................................................................................................... 4
Table 2: Abbreviations .................................................................................................................................................. 4
Table 7. Employer’s Drawings ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
The de-grit system – dirty drains recovery consists of one sump per unit for all 6 units. The Dirty
Drains Recovery - de-gritting Sumps accumulate water containing fly ash and coarse ash particles
in sumps located around the plant site and transfer this water to the coal stockyard settling basin.
Each sump consists of two submersible pumps and units 4 to 6 had the same sized pump units.
During the startup of Unit 4 and 5 there were pump failures which resulted in unit 6 pumps being
used at these units. Two replacement pumps are therefore required for unit 6.
2 supporting clauses
Scope
The purpose of this document is to define the Works required on all stated structures and systems.
Applicability
This document is applicable to Kusile Power Station.
Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
Normative
[1]. ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
[2]. All work shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Occupational Health
and Safety Act (Act ) as amended.
[3]. SANS 1200 Series: Standardised Specification For Civil Engineering Construction
[4]. SANS 10142-1: The wiring of premises. Part 1: Low-voltage installations.
[5]. ESKASAAA3 Approval of Personnel Performing Quality Related Special Processes on all
Eskom Plant.
[6]. GGS 0462 Eskom Quality Requirement.
[7]. NWS 1058 Safety at Construction Sites.
[8]. OHSACT Occupational Health and Safety Act, .
[9]. PA/270/003 Safety Guide for Contractors.
[10]. PS/031/001 Scaffolding Erection, Use and Inspection Standard Process.
[11]. SABS ISO 9000 I-III SERIES Code of Practice for Quality Systems (as Amended).
[12]. OPR 3305 (rev 3) Eskom Plant Safety Regulations.
Informative
[13]. 32-727 Safety, Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ) Policy/Procedure
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Definitions
Table 1: Table of Definitions
Definition Description
Service provider contracted to provide a specific service to Eskom, Kusile
Contractor
Power Station.
Employer Eskom, or Eskom Kusile Power Station or representative
A registered Professional Engineer or a registered Professional Engineering
Engineer Technologist specialising in and having experience in the design of lifting
stations.
Abbreviations
Table 2: Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
CoC Certificate of Completion
KET Kusile Execution Team
OHSA Occupational health and Safety Act
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
QA Quality Assurance
QC Quality Control
QCP Quality Control Plan
QMS Quality Management System
SABS South African Bureau of Standards
SANS South African National Standards
SHE Safety Health and Environmental
SOW Scope of Work
Roles and responsibilities
Contractor to provide personnel with appropriate and suitable skills to perform the work.
The Contractor ensures Compliance with all requirements of the Occupational Health and
Safety Act no and its regulations so as to ensure the health and safety of persons
carrying out the Works.
Process for monitoring
Not applicable.
Related/supporting documents
As referenced herein and appendix A
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
3 engineering and contractor’s design
Description of works/ works information
The following sections contain the details of the Works required to be completed by the Contractor.
The work under these specifications shall include furnishing of two submersible sump pumps,
including driver and all other specified accessories.
General
The sump pumps shall be submersible unit supplied in accordance with section 3.1.3 and
Appendix A.
Scope of supply shall include the furnishing of two (2) submersible sump pumps including drivers.
Performance and Design Requirements
Performance and design requirements for the equipment to be furnished under this section of these
specifications are indicated herein.
The sump pumps shall be sized for the following conditions:
Pump Identification numbers/ KKS Tags 6 0GME11 AP001;
6 0gme12 ap001;
Rated capacity 169 m3/h
Rated total head, meters of water 44m
Maximum Shutoff Head, percent of rated 125%
head
Specific Gravity at rated conditions – light 1.0317
slurry (at 5 deg. C Water)
Specific gravity at worst case solids (30% 1.226
solids) (at 5 deg. C Water)
Maximum solids diameter 40mm
Min/Rated/Design Temperature, Deg. C 5/ 34/ 65
Power 70 kW
Maximum Rated Speed 1,500 rpm
Rated Voltage 400v
Frequency 50 Hz
Phases 3-Phase plus neutral.
Rated Current 132A
NEMA/IEC Enclosure IP 68
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Electrical Service See Standard 240-57617975
Factory performance Test Yes
Power supply cable length from existing 10.0 m
terminal box
Drawings and Data
Catalog cuts and manufacturer's specifications covering the sump pump and accessories shall be
Submitted to Engineer for approval.
Motor Assembly
The Contractor provides low voltage motors that are designed and purchased with the pumps and
associated pump cables, in accordance with Eskom Standard 240-57617975. All LV motors are
rated at 400V. The motors are provided for being submerged in the sump along with the pump.
Motors shall be arranged for vertical mounting integral with the driven equipment. Enclosure shall
be waterproof submersible type. External surfaces shall be coated with moisture corrosion-resistant
alkyd enamel or with polyester or epoxy paint or coating. Metal-to-metal fits shall be coated with
corrosion resistant compound. Shaft and hardware shall be of corrosion-resistant material. The shaft
shall be threaded for attaching the impeller. Rotors shall be dynamically balanced and coated with a
corrosion-resistant polyester paint.
Routine tests shall be performed on each motor at the manufacturer's factory to confirm that there
are no electrical or mechanical defects. The motor shall be able to operate above the water level
without overheating.
Other Accessories
Connections shall be provided at the top of the pumps for lifting. Each pump shall be supplied
with an agitator at the pump suction that connects to the impeller shaft.
Test Requirements
The manufacturer shall allow for a workshop performance test or at least a run test prior to the
release of the pump.
4 authorisation
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name & Surname Designation
Tumiso Railo Kusile Project Engineering Manager
Yuvir Gokul Kusile Engineering EDWL
Richie Sibiya Kusile Electrical Technologist
Chris Odendaal Kusile LPS LDE
Tiyani Malwandla Kusile Mechanical Engineer
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
5 revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
January 2025 0 T. Malwandla -
July 2025 1 T. Malwandla Pump quantity revision
February 2026 2 T. Malwandla Pump quantity revision
6 development team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
Tiyani Malwandla
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Appendix a: employer’s documents for the works
The latest revisions of the following listed drawings are included as Attachments and shall form part
of the Employer's Documents.
Table 3. Employer’s Drawings
Drawing No. Rev No. Title
366-27222 1 Unit 6 Sump Pump Performance Curve
366-27223 5 Unit 6 Degrit Sump Motor Data Sheet
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Appendix b– ESKOM standards and guidelines
Code description
SANS 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
SANS 10142-1 The Wiring of Premises – Low Voltage Installations
240-56227443 Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Stations
SPF 200-4190 The Application of KKS Plant Coding Standard
240-128515850 Documentation Handover Specification.
240-86973501 Engineering Drawing Standards – Common Requirements
240-57617975 Low Voltage Motor Procurement Standard
240-106365693 Standard for the External Corrosion Protection of Plant
Equipment Associated Piping with Coating
OHSA Personnel protection
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
This document contains information regarding the Requirements for Control and Power Cables for
Power Stations Standard.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This document has been prepared to assist those involved in the designing and installation of cables at
the power station. All cabling and associated work shall be designed and executed in accordance with
approved standards, codes of practice and the manufacturer’s recommendations
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to define the requirements with regard to the selection, design and
execution of cabling by the cabling Contractor and other contractors carrying out work at the power
station
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Limited Divisions.
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs. The latest revision and amendments of the following documents shall be read in conjunction
with this specification. However, in cases of conflict the provisions of this specification shall take
precedence
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ASTM E814 Fire Test of through Penetration Fire Stops
[2] ESKARAAG 4 Operating Regulations for High-Voltage Systems
[3] ESKSCAAB8 Specification for corrosion protection of mechanical items of plant
[4] GGR 0992 Plant Safety Regulations
[5] GGP 0184 Performance guidelines for fire barrier seals
[6] GGS 0183 Fire Barrier Seals for Cable Installations in Power Stations
[7] GGS 0224 Fire protection at coal fired power stations
[8] GGS 0386 Requirements for Power and Control Cables for Power Stations
[9] GGS 0445 Drawing numbering system.
[10] IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
[11] IEEE 634 Testing for Fire Rated Penetration Seals
[12] NRS 028 Cable Lugs and Ferrules for Cu and Al Conductors preferred requirements for the
application in the Electrical Supply Industry
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
[13] NWS 1220 Specification for Cable Junction and Reduction Boxes for Power Stations
[14] NWS 1527 Eskom Specification for the Installation of Cables and Cable Racks at Power Stations
[15] OHS Act no Electrical Installation Regulation under Occupational Health and Safety.
[16] H.V. TEST CC A handy guide to the safe over voltage pressure testing , and condition monitoring
of cable installations
[17] SANS 97 Impregnated-paper-insulated metal-sheathed cables for rated voltages from 3.3/3.3 kV
up to 19/33 kV
[18] SANS 791 Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) sewer and drain pipes and pipe fittings
[19] SANS 1091 National colour standards for paint.
[20] SANS 1213 Mechanical cable glands
[21] SANS 1339 Electric Cables–Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated cables for voltages from
3.8/6.6kV to 19/33kV.
[22] SANS 1411 Materials of insulated electrical cables and flexible cords, Parts 1 to 6
[23] SANS 1507 Electric cables with extruded solid dielectric insulation for fixed installations
[24] SANS 1520-2 Flexible electric trailing cable for use in mines. Part 2: High voltage (3.8/6.6kV to
19/33kV) cables.
2.2.2 Informative
[25] SANS 1574 Electric cables-flexible cords
[26] SANS 9000 to 9004 Quality management systems and standards.
[27] SANS 60269 Low-Voltage Fuses
[28] SANS 10142-1 The wiring for premises Part 1: low-voltage installations.
[29] SANS 10177-2 Fire testing of materials, components and elements used in buildings Part 2: Fire
resistance test for building elements.
[30] SANS 10198-1 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 1: Definitions and statutory requirements, South African Bureau of Standards,
Pretoria.
[31] SANS 10198-2 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 2: Choice of cable type and methods of installation, South African Bureau of
Standards, Pretoria.
[32] SANS 10198-3 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 3: Earthing systems - general provisions, South African Bureau of Standards,
Pretoria.
[33] SANS 10198-4 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 4: Current ratings, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[34] SANS 10198-5 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 5: Determination of thermal and electrical resistivity of soil, South African
Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[35] SANS 10198-6 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 6: Transportation and storage, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
[36] SANS 10198-7 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 7: Safety precautions, SABS of Standards, Pretoria.
[37] SANS 10198-8 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 8: Cable laying and installation, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[38] SANS 10198-9 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 9: Jointing and termination of extruded solid dielectric insulated cables up to
3,3 kV, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[39] SANS 10198-12 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 12: Installation of earthing system, South African Bureau of Standards,
Pretoria.0.00/10335 Power and control wiring terminations
[40] 0.00/1310 Standard Power and Control Cable Code
[41] 0.00/2713 Instrument Cable Code
[42] 0.54/393, C12 Earthing: Metal cladding
[43] 0.54/393, C16 Earthing: Tanks and bases
[44] 0.54/393, C19 Earthing: All single core cable sealing ends
[45] 0.54/393, C20 Earthing: Switchboards with thermoplastic insulated cables
[46] 0.54/393, C21 Earthing: Switchboards with paper insulated cables
[47] 0.54/393, C22 Earthing: Armoured multi-core control and power cables
[48] 0.54/393, C23 Earthing: Gland plate earthing details0.54/393, C26 Earthing: Bolted connection
between copper strap and copper rods
[49] 0.54/393, C22 Earthing of process control computers
[50] 0.54/393, C30 Earthing of electrical enclosures
[51] 0.54/393, P1 Earthing of oil type transformers in power stations
[52] 0.54/393, P2 Earthing: Motors fed by XLPE or thermoplastic cables
[53] 0.54/393, P3 Earthing: Motors fed by MICC, conduit or PILCSWA cables mounted on earthed
material
[54] 0.54/393, P4 Earthing: Motors fed by MICC, conduit or PILCSWA cables mounted on un¬earthed
material
[55] 0.54/393, P5 Earthing: Steel enclosures mounted on earthed material and connected with un-
earthed cables
[56] 0.54/393, P6 Earthing: Control equipment and local motor starters
[57] 0.54/393, P7 Earthing: Power station auxiliary bay signal earth terminal box
[58] 0.54/393, P9 Earthing of smaller 3-phase consumer without neutral with 4-core cable
[59] 0.54/393, C1, C2 & C3 Earth mat and details
[60] 0.66/3355 Cable route marker
[61] 0.66/3356 Typical section of cable trenches
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
Drives are all mechanical or electrical prime movers, e.g. actuators, fans,
Drives
pumps, etc
The power system from the generator terminals to the 400 kV bushings of
Export system the generator transformer and the unit transformer 11 kV bushings and
includes the busbars, circuit breakers, earth switches and transformers
The 22/420kV step up transformer that connects the generator to the
Generator transformer
transmission system
Maintenance is the function of restoring failed/worn components to a state
where it is capable of meeting its design intent and performance
Maintenance function
expectations, by repair or rework achieved through the application of
material and human resources in an efficient and cost effective manner
Major plant Machinery e.g. feed pumps, turbine, mill, air heater, etc
Station or Power Station Medupi Power Station
Boiler, turbine, generator, unit cooling water system, fabric filter plant and
Unit
including all auxiliary plant and systems associated with the unit
The 22/11.5 kV step down transformers that connects the export system to
Unit transformers
the unit boards
2.3.1 Classification
a. Controlled Disclosure: Controlled Disclosure to External Parties (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
Process control
P Open- (racks) and covered (trays). All control, instrumentation and
telephone cables below 60 V AC or DC
Low Voltage
L Power supply cables 24 V and 220 V DC, control cables 220 V DC and
230 V AC, power cables, 230 V, 400 V and 660 V AC
Low voltage trefoil
Power cables 400 and 660 V in trefoil (and neutral for 400 V)
S
configuration
Medium Voltage
M
Power Cables 6.6 and 11 kV three core
T Medium Voltage trefoil
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
2.5 Roles and responsibilities
None
2.6 Process for monitoring
None
2.7 Related/supporting documents
None
3. Compliance with standards
3.1 Compliance with standards
The installation of cables and cable racking shall be in strict accordance with the law, SABS codes of
practice and standards as well as the reference documents detailed under section 3.
3.1.1 Life expectancy:
The design, equipment selection and the installation of the cables and the associated equipment shall be
performed in such a way to have a 50 year life expectancy
3.1.2 Cable identification
3.1.2.1 Plant systems and cable schedules
a. Block diagrams and cable schedules for construction cables shall be prepared and maintained by
the Employer.
b. Cable block diagrams and system cable lists for all permanent installations shall be prepared by the
contractor responsible for providing the plant (in accordance with another specification). These
schedules shall then be issued to the cabling Contractor for the final design, routing, installation and
testing of the required cables.
c. The Employer shall also issue cable schedules (and block diagrams in selected areas) to the cabling
Contractor for areas of plant where the interface design of the installation is performed by the
Employer. The cabling Contractor shall perform the final design, routing, installation and testing of
these cables.
d. Separate cable schedules shall be issued for each distinct board, system etc.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.1.2.2 Cable identification code
Cable coding is the identification of cables according to the origin of the cable. The cable number format
shall be as follows:
Table 1: Cable Identification Code
Classifying Element Numbering Element
Process Related Code Cable Number
NNAAA i.e. 00ETK NNNN i.e. 8001
Or
Point of Installation Code Cable Number
NNAAA i.e. 00EYG NNNN i.e. 8001
3.1.3 Cable number tag details
All cables shall be labelled with standard UV resistant PVC K Type flexible cable markers on nine digit
carrier strips and attached on both ends with suitable cable ties (T18R or T30R depending on cable
thickness) as follows:
Figure 1: 10BBA1003
a. Cable number tags shall be fixed to the cables as follows:
One tag inside a floor mounted cubicle, switchboard etc. visible through open door.
One tag below the cubicle, switchboard etc. to permit identification of the cable from below the fire
barrier or other seal of the floor opening above which the board is mounted.
One tag at the cable entry into the field mounted equipment (for cubicles with top or side entry or
where a cable enters an enclosure from an open run only one tag just below the cable gland is
required).
b. Cable numbers for application in chemical corrosive environments or outside buildings e.g. coal and
ash conveying plant shall be stainless steel with engraved black letters and numbers and fixed with
stainless steel wire.
3.1.4 Standard cable codes
The cable types shall be designated in accordance with the codes detailed on the following drawings:
0.00/1310 Standard power and control cable code
0.00/2713 Instrument cable codeThe 31/2 core cables are designated with a Z instead of a 0 in the
otherwise numerical portion of the cable code, i.e. BVVZ4SCM.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2 Cable types and specification
3.2.1 General
a. The tables at the end of this document list the cables selected for use at the power station. This
listing has been compiled to optimise the number of different types of cable to be used at the power
station. No further types shall be introduced without prior consultation with the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall indicate basic information with regard to the compounds used in the cable
construction of each type of cable as per Schedule B.
3.2.2 Medium voltage power cables
3.2.2.1 Unarmoured 6.6 kV and 11 kV power cables (DXG and EXG cables)
a. In the power station buildings unarmoured Type B cables with copper conductors (class 2 in terms of
SANS 1411-1) shall be used. These cables shall be installed in protected runs on cable trays and do
not require armouring.
b. The cables shall be XLPE insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer
sheath (emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen). Acceptance criteria for insulation shall be in
accordance with SANS 1411-2.
c. Single and three core cables shall be with the cores individually screened with copper tape. Cables
shall be manufactured in accordance with SANS 1339 and SANS 1411 Parts 1, 2, 4 and 7.
3.2.3 Armoured 6.6 kV and 11 kV cables (DXE and EXE cables)
a. For outdoor installations where mechanical damage is possible, installation in concrete trenches or
direct burial in ground the cables shall be round steel wire armoured Type A (BVXnnCV) with copper
conductors (class 2 in terms of SANS 1411-1).
b. The cables shall be XLPE insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer
sheath and bedding (emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen). Acceptance criteria for insulation
shall be in accordance with SANS 1411-2.
c. Single and 3-core cables shall be with the cores individually screened with copper tape. These
cables shall be manufactured to SANS 1339 and SANS 1411 Parts 1, 2, 4, 6 and 7.
3.2.4 Single core 6.6 kV and 11 kV cables application
a. Single core cables shall only be used on major power distribution circuits where the current rating is
such that multi-core cables are not practical.
b. Where trefoil clamps are used for single core cables in trefoil configuration, these clamps must be
capable of withstanding the forces generated by short circuits as shown in paragraph 11.3.
c. All armoured single core cables in trefoil groups shall be earthed on one side only in order to prevent
armour circulating currents flowing through closed circuits. Single point earthing shall be carried out
on the feeding side of board to board feeders or on the normal side of supply in a ring feeder
section.
d. On feeds from a board via a transformer to another board (typical example: 11 kV board to
transformer to 6.6 kV board) the cable armouring shall be earthed in the boards only.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2.5 Voltage rating
For XLPE insulated cables no voltage over rating is required (the reticulation system is high resistance
earthed) and the rated cable voltages shall be as follows:
For the 6.6 kV system the rated cable voltage is 3.8/6.6 kV.
For the 11 kV system the rated cable voltage is 6.35/11 kVFor paper insulated cables over rating of
the voltage level is required and the rated cable voltages shall be as follows:
For the 6.6 kV system the rated cable voltage is 6.35/11 kV.
For the 11 kV system the rated cable voltage is 12.7/22 kV.
3.2.6 Low voltage power cables
3.2.6.1 Unarmoured low voltage power cables
a. The cables shall be PVC insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer sheath
(emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen).
b. This type of cable shall be applied for control cables (i.e. 220 V DC, and 230 V AC) and AC power
cables (i.e. 230 V, 400 V, 660 V).
c. Low voltage 600/1000 V cables shall be manufactured to SANS 1507 as amended and SANS 1411
parts 1 and 2.
3.2.6.2 Armoured low voltage power cables
a. The cables shall be PVC insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer sheath
and bedding (emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen).
b. This range of cables shall be round steel wire armoured for burial in ground and for installations
where mechanical stresses are expected and shall be used for control cables (DC: 220 V, AC: 230
V) and power cables (230 V, 400 V AC).
c. The cables shall be manufactured to SANS 1507 and SANS 1411 Parts 1, 2 and 6. 8.3.3
Unarmoured and armoured power cables application
d. In the cable size range of 35 mm2 to 185 mm2 31/2 core cables with a neutral core approximately
1/2 of the cross sectional area of the phase conductors shall be used.
e. Where unarmoured cables are used for the interconnection between lead acid batteries and
chargers, separate cables shall be used for both the positive and negative connections. Depending
on the current rating the use of parallel cores in a two, three or four core cable shall be acceptable
for such connections provided the installation of a 630 mm2 single core cable is not warranted. Red
and blue sleeving shall then be used on all parallel cores when terminating the positive and negative
cables respectively (insulation tape shall not be acceptable).
f. At the battery side the cables shall be terminated onto take-off plates away from the batteries and
busbar connections shall be provided for connecting from the take off plates to the battery terminals.
The take off plates shall be provided by Others.
g. Where Nickel Cadmium batteries are mounted separately from the charger cubicle the
interconnections shall be made by two (2) core cables or using two (2) parallel cores in a four (4)
core cable, depending on current rating and available cable sizes. Standard core insulation shall be
covered by red and blue sleeving, where necessary, to indicate positive and negative, pole
connections respectively.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2.6.3 Colour coding of low voltage cable cores and terminations
a. Normal colour coding of cable cores to SANS 1507 Table 1 shall be used for cables with:
2 cores: red – black.
3 cores: red - yellow – blue.
4 cores: red -yellow - blue – black (green/yellow).
7, 12, 19 and 37 cores: numbers 1 to 7, 12, 19 or 37 respectively.
b. For termination purposes it may become necessary to code cores by coloured sleeves:
AC phase colours: red - yellow - blue
Neutral: black
DC positive: red
DC negative: blue
DC battery midpoint: black
Earth: green/yellow (plain green sleeving is not permissible).
3.2.6.4 Use of fourth cable core as earth continuity conductor
a. For three wire circuits fed by four core cables up to 16 mm2 phase conductors shall be colour coded
red - white-blue as per the SABS specifications. The fourth, black conductor shall be fitted with a
neatly fitting green-yellow sleeve before any lug is crimped onto it to indicate its use as earth
conductor.
b. In switchboards all earth continuity conductors shall be terminated onto the earth bar provided by the
switchboard supplier with predrilled 7 mm holes. The Contractor shall provide the M6 bolt, spring
washers, washers and nuts for such terminations (also refer to clause 8.4).
3.2.7 Control, protection and instrumentation cables
3.2.7.1 Cable type BVXnnCM
a. Multi-core thermoplastic insulated cables shall be used for all current transformer and voltage
transformer, secondary circuits and protection, tripping and closing circuits. These cables shall have
a voltage rating of 600/1000 V and current ratings dependent on the cross sectional area (details are
given in tables 11 and 12).
b. The minimum conductor size used for generator protection current transformer circuits shall be 2.5
mm2. For other applications the minimum size used shall be 1.5 mm2. All voltage transformer
circuits shall be run in dedicated cables with a minimum conductor size of 2.5 mm2 in the HV yard
and inside the power station.
c. Note that current sensors may be used in the MV switchgear and these shall then be cabled with
braided screen type cables.
d. Armoured or unarmoured cables for certain sensitive applications shall be laid in a protected run
separated from the normal cable installation in order to increase mechanical protection and fire
survivability. In general armoured cables shall be laid where armouring is essential for physical
protection e.g. for burial in ground or in positions with an increased danger of mechanical damage
either during installation or in service. Properly earthed steel wire armouring also provides a degree
of protection against electromagnetic interference in areas with a high disturbance signal level.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
e. Cables shall have numbered cores except for 2, 3 or 4 core cables, which are colour coded. All
cores shall be ferruled with the lead numbers shown on the cabling drawings.
3.2.7.2 Cable type BVSnnCM
Multi-core thermoplastic insulated overall screened (not armoured) cables of the BVS series shall be
used for non-conventional control circuits where low impedance electronic circuitry is employed. This
cable type shall only be used when requested specifically by the Employer.
3.2.7.3 Cable type UVGnnACM
a. For all digital and analogue signals where low level signals apply, thermoplastic insulated overall
screened twisted pair UVG control cables shall be used except for cables in this category which run,
over long distances outside of buildings or are buried in ground. Conductor pairs in this series shall
be identified by a colour code system of orange, violet and turquoise rings.
b. The individual cores shall not be numbered or ferruled and shall be terminated in sequence as set
out by the Engineer.
c. Type UVG cables shall have a voltage rating of 300/500 V with a rated conductor area of 0.5 mm2
and a signal level of 1 A shall not be exceeded.
d. Screens and drain wires shall be terminated at both ends in accordance with instructions provided by
the respective supplier. In some cases, screens are earthed at one end only, usually the point of
cable source e.g. cables to temperature or vibration sensors of a motor with insulated bearing
pedestals.
3.2.8 Mineral Insulated cables
a. Mineral insulated cables shall only be used in exceptional circumstances where route temperatures
are high. They shall not used where vibration could result in failure due to metal fatigue. Where
mineralinsulated cable is used for motor supplies, it shall be terminated in a junction box near the
motor and the final connection made with special cable suitable for the high ambient temperature i.e.
silicon insulated cable or equivalent.
3.2.9 Flexible connections
Where electrical equipment is mounted on the boiler face which is subject to vertical movement due to
heat expansion the connection between the equipment and the static steelwork shall be made by means
of high temperature flexible cables in a flexible conduit. This cabling shall be supplied and installed by
the Contractor.
3.2.10 Marking and information on cable sheaths
a. All cable sheaths shall be black with colour coding traces or printing as follows:
Table 2: Marking and information on cable sheaths
Cable trace colour identifying cable as having
Red Flame retardant PVC sheath only (LOI >27%)
Orange Flame retardant PVC bedding and sheath
Blue Low halogen emission PVC bedding and sheath (See note 1)
White Halogen free cable
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2.10.1 Notes:
a. The emission of HCL gases in a fire situation is reduced from approximately 30% of the weight for
standard PVC to below 15%.
b. This industry coding shall be given preference above that of the Employer’s code. The trace colour
codes shall be indicated in Schedule B for the respective cable manufacturers to be used as
suppliers.
c. If the cable is identified by a colour coding trace extruded into the sheath which in the manufacturer’s
opinion weakens the sheath and if the cable manufacturer cannot guarantee the mechanical
properties of such sheathing under all conditions e.g. abuse during installation and UV radiation over
extended periods, the Employer will desist from requesting such coding traces. It is then preferred to
have the required information embossed into or invariably printed in colour code onto the cable
sheath in the process of extruding the sheath onto the cable. This information includes:
voltage level,
name or trade-mark of cable manufacturer and
SABS specification to which the cable is manufactured, even if some portions of the cable make-up
deviate from the specification such as SANS 1507.
d. Cable manufacturers may find it convenient to divide or duplicate this information by means of two
embossings or printing rollers on opposite sides of the cables up to 15 mm diameter. For cables
above 15 mm diameter two (or more) lines shall be required. The height of the characters shall not
be less than 15% of the cable overall diameter.
e. The Contractor shall indicate in writing which cable sheath compounds are provided for and which
method of marking and information (colour traces or coloured printing) shall be used.
3.2.11 Dimensions of cables
Tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 indicate the nominal overall diameter of the cables to be selected for the power
station. Reference is made to Schedule B of the Contract for guaranteed dimensions, where these are
required.
3.2.12 Special cables
Special cable types which may be required for thermocouple leads, high temperature/high flexibility
applications, or heavy current high frequency applications such as turbo generator excitation circuits are
not covered by this standard. The supply and installation of such cables shall be the responsibility of the
supplier of the associated Plant.
3.3 Layout, racking and laying
3.3.1 Drawings
a. The Employer shall provide drawings showing cable servitudes and the cable layout along the
servitudes.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
b. The cabling contractor shall provide a cable racking system vertically, horizontally and horizontally in
a vertical plane as called for in the specification and in the drawings issued by the Employer. Details
of the racking system and/or supplementary steelwork shall be submitted to the Engineer for
acceptance before installation. Where necessary the Employer shall obtain approval from Others
responsible for major structures to which racking should be fitted.
3.3.2 Cable racks
a. Cable racks shall be provided such that every cable is adequately supported throughout its run.
Racking for power cables and control cables shall be designed to support the cables at least every
375 mm. Control cables may have to run on cable trays or in ducting so that they are supported over
their entire length.
b. The minimum spacing between open telephone, control and instrumentation cable racks and power
cable racks shall be 1000 mm. This may be reduced at crossings, which is at right angles. Where
limited space makes it necessary to bring power and control cable racking closer than 1000 mm,
control cable trays shall be installed and closed by means of a suitable cover to create a Faraday
cage around the control cables.
c. Separate racks or trays shall be installed for cables of the following voltage levels:
d. Power cables 6.6 kV and 11 kV in trefoil configuration
e. Cables in trefoil configuration shall be clamped with non-magnetic clamps capable of withstanding
forces generated by short circuit currents in accordance with paragraph 11.3. The normal centre line
distance between clamps shall be 750 mm but clamps shall be fixed to the racking only every 3000
mm.
f. For field mounted runs, in particular for small power and control cabling, cable trays manufactured
from high tension wire mesh shall be acceptable. These trays are less prone to collection of dust.
3.3.3 Reduction of fire hazards along racking routes
a. Where practical, cable racks shall be routed away from fire exposure or hazards or shall be
protected from such exposures. Where cable racks are subject to oil spills, they shall be designed to
prevent the spread of oil spill fires (see paragraph 9.9, Sun and dust shields).
b. Under-floor and concealed cable spreading areas which have a height of more that 800 mm and
total floor area exceeding 300 m2 shall allow for the provision with a fire detection system (by
Others). Refer also to the standard GGS 0224, Fire Protection at Coal Fired Power Stations.
3.3.4 Loading of cable trays and ladder racks
a. The laying of cable onto racks shall conform to the following requirements:
Two MV or LV trefoil groups per 450 mm wide rack.
Three MV or LV trefoil groups per 600 mm wide rack*Three LV trefoil groups plus two neutral cables per 60
All three core MV and multi-core LV cables above 16 mm2 rated area are laid in a single layer per
rack only.
LV cables up to 6 mm2 rated area are laid in a double layer on crowded rack routes, otherwise also
only in single layers.
Stacking of control and telephone cables up to the top edge of the side member is permissible.
b. The following worst case loads for horizontal cable racks in kg per linear metre of racking shall apply:
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
Table 3: Loading of Cable Trays and Ladder Racks (A)
Loading of horizontal racks
Rack width [mm]
Parameter
150 300 450 600 800 1000
Dead weight cable load 30 kg 60 kg 90 kg 120 kg 150 kg 190 kg
Safety factor 1.6 for 50 kg 100 kg 150 kg 200 kg 240 kg 305 kg
dead weight
Live weight (2) 115 kg 145 kg 175 kg 205 kg 235 kg 275 kg
Safety factor 1.2 for live 140 kg 175 kg 210 kg 245 kg 280 kg 330 kg
weight
Resultant design load 150 kg 180 kg 220 kg 250 kg 300 kg 350 kg
Notes:
1000 mm wide rack is used generally for cable risers only. In individually approved and exceptional
cases only, it may be used for horizontal runs.
c. The distance of support columns shall be selected in such a way that a horizontally installed rack
shall be deflected not more than 1:150 at the midpoint between two supports when subjected to the
design load shown above i.e. 5 mm at the midpoint between supports 1500 mm apart.
d. Where support columns carry more than one rack or tray the centre line distance shall be selected
according to the design load of the rack carrying the greatest design load.
e. A cantilever arm may not deflect more that 1:150 at the front when supporting a rack with a load
equal to the design load shown above evenly distributed over its width i.e. 5 mm approximately for a
cantilever arm carrying a 800 mm wide rack.
f. The following worst case loads for perforated cable trays in kg per linear metre of tray shall apply:
Table 4: Loading of Cable Trays and Ladder Racks (B)
Loading of perforated cable trays
Rack width [mm]
Parameter
150 300 450 600 800
Dead weight cable load 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg 120 kg 150 kg
Safety factor 2,5 for dead 150 kg 200 kg 250 kg 300 kg 375 kg
weight
Design load (1) and (2) 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg 120 kg 150 kg
g. Note that for (1) both cable trays and weldmesh racks shall not normally be expected to carry live
weight of persons climbing on to the trays for installation or maintenance purposes (must be
positioned so as to avoid ready “step functions”) and (2) the weights indicated above are based on a
centreline distances of supports of 1500 mm.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.3.5 Separation of power and control cables at outside plant buildings and substations
In order to minimise problems inside and outside buildings with routing and laying of cables and also
noise interference in control cables, separate power and control cable entry into buildings shall be used.
Where possible two or more separate cable entry openings shall be provided or made use of. This will
also facilitate early separate closing of openings when cable laying is completed (in stages).
3.3.6 Use of racking by Others
The Employer shall advise the Contractor on racking requirements of Others. The Contractor shall install
racking for such purposes at the rate prices of the contract. The Engineer shall advise the Contractor
with regard to exact requirements as well as the required completion dates for the racking.
3.3.7 Supporting of cables on racks
a. Armoured and unarmoured multi-core cables shall be supported every 375 mm in the horizontal
position where racks are provided. Where cables leave the racks or descend or ascend vertically,
they shall be clamped every 750 mm at clipping points to be provided by the Contractor.
b. Single core cables shall be clamped by clipping points at intervals not exceeding 750 mm in the
horizontal position but, although fixing holes are provided in the supporting steelwork at each
clipping point, they shall be fixed to the supports every 3000 mm only. Alternative fixing points shall
be offset against each other by about 100 mm along the racking route in order to create a basic
snake formation along which the cable can expand and contract on heat cycling. Single core cables
shall be clamped by clipping points at intervals not exceeding 750 mm in the vertical position.
3.3.8 Clipping points
Clipping points are defined as all points at which cables are secured to racking, trays, walls or ceilings by
means of cleats, straps or saddles, made of nylon, stainless steel or another approved material.
3.3.8.1 General
a. On cable risers cables shall be fixed to cable ladders or inside trays at 750 mm intervals.
b. On vertical cable runs in (galvanised) conduit adequate space between separate conduit lengths
shall be left to allow strapping of the cable to a support structure to take up the weight of the cable
for each conduit length.
c. On horizontal racks installed in a vertical plane cables shall be strapped every 375 mm to ensure a
neat appearance.
3.3.8.2 Single core cables
a. Clipping points for trefoil groups of/or single core cables comprise a non magnetic portion or is of
non magnetic material to prevent the creation of eddy currents in the clamp. Hardwood shall not be
acceptable. Clamps shall be the correct size for the cables.
b. Clamps shall be capable of withstanding the forces generated by the through fault current specified
in clause 11.3 when installed in accordance with this specification.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.3.8.3 Multi-core cables
a. Clipping points for multi-core cables shall be applied at positions in accordance with clause 9.7 and
include the supply of materials, drilling of concrete and steelwork, painting if required, and the
installation of the cleats.
b. For indoor and outdoor installations protected from direct sun radiation nylon strapping shall be used
for all cables up to 30 mm diameter.
c. Stainless steel strapping shall be used for cables above 30 mm diameter for indoor installation. For
all cables installed outdoors only stainless steel strapping shall be acceptable. Stainless steel
strapping shall be strapped over a plastic bedding strip to prevent damage to the cable sheath.
Alternatively coated stainless steel strapping shall be used.
d. Approved galvanised “K-clamps” with rubber or plastic inserts to protect the cable shall be used for
terminating unarmoured cables in floor mounted indoor switchboards. The switchboard manufacturer
shall provide suitable C-profile rails.
e. All clipping and strapping material (and methods) shall be approved by the Engineer before
installation is undertaken.
3.3.8.4 Control cables
Where a large number of control cables are accommodated in a limited space, they may be bunched
and fixed to racking or trays by means of an approved strap. Not more than 12 cables shall be
accommodated under one strap.
3.3.9 Sun and dust shields
a. Where cabling is subject to direct sun radiation, oil spills or severe dust accumulation, shields shall
be provided. The shields shall be designed to protect the cables against sunlight or against oil, dust
and other foreign matter, as required for the particular case and does not obstruct air flow past the
cables or diminish the thermal rating of the cables in any way.
b. Sun shields shall be designed to protect cable racks against direct sun radiation at angles not less
than 35o from the vertical plane and if slotted for ventilation, gives not less than 75% coverage.
3.3.10 Sleeve pipes for cables
Sleeve pipes shall be provided to carry cables under roadways, foundations, aprons and certain floors.
Details of all permissible types of cable pipes are provided in Table 7.
3.3.11 Cable chases
Cables shall only be buried in chases in concrete floors or walls where no alternative arrangements are
possible. Floor chases shall be filled with sand and screeded over. This arrangement is avoided in areas
where oil spillage is possible.
3.3.12 Cable laying in ground
a. The details of the depth of laying and spacing of all types of cable used is as shown in Table 9. The
dimensions stated are the minimum permissible and shall not be reduced without investigating
current loadings in detail (refer also to drawing number 0.66/3356). Where cables are laid in ground,
such runs shall be shown in detail on appropriate drawings for reference purposes and protected by
concrete slabs or yellow plastic cover plates and marker tapes.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
b. Every effort shall be made to run cables either in tunnels, trenches or sleeve pipes, should they have
to be laid below ground level.
3.3.13 Cable route markers
Concrete cable route markers as per drawing 0.66/3355 shall be provided to mark all cable servitudes
and the general location of buried cables. The route markers shall be located at 50 m intervals and
wherever a route changes direction, to mark buried joints and where cables cross roads, railways or any
other servitudes.
3.3.14 Cable laying in air from great heights
a. In the boiler house area it is usual practice to lay cables from drums transported to the highest floor
level required. Extreme care shall be taken when lowering cable for laying from a drum to ensure
that the cable weight is countered by a suitable braking means (e.g. weight of 100 m, 4 x 70 mm2
armoured cable is 510 kg). Assuming the total unarmoured cable weight is taken up by the
conductors only, the weight of 100 m is about 10% of the ultimate tensile strength only. This method
shall be acceptable, provided that clipping is performed promptly.
b. Attempts shall be made to limit the pulling force required to a minimum to avoid stretching the outer
layers of the cable. The cable manufacturer's maximum allowable mechanical forces on cables
during installation shall not be exceeded.
3.4 Termination of cables and cores
3.4.1 Termination through gland plates
a. Where cables enter enclosures through gland plates, mechanical cable glands of the armour or
cable gripping type to SANS 1213 shall be used. Glands shall be of the correct size for the cable.
Weatherproof shrouds shall be required only for exposed positions indoors and for all field mounted
terminations.
b. The quality of cable gland terminations shall be in line with and may not be lower than the degree of
protection (IP rating) of the enclosure against ingress of dust and water.
c. For MV cables where cable glands are required, split gland plates shall be provided to enable
removal of the cable without removal of the gland plate.
d. For single core cable terminations the gland plate and both gland and lock nut shall be of non-
magnetic material.
e. Cables shall be installed from the back to the front on the gland plate to enable cables to be added
without difficulty at a later stage, if required. Low voltage and control cables shall be grouped
separately on the gland plate.
f. Outdoor cables shall not enter at the top of a distribution board and where cables enter on the side,
care shall be taken to prevent water ingress.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.4.2 Termination of cables in switchboards
a. Where cables (larger than 70 mm2) enter switchboards or other cubicles through floor openings,
which will later be closed by adequately fire rated material to make them also vermin proof, gland
plates shall not be considered as essential. In that case the switchboard manufacturer is held
responsible for providing unistrut or similar rails to which cables can be securely clamped by the
cable contractor by means of “K-clamps” or approved equivalent. Non magnetic clamps shall be
used for single core cables.
b. Where space within the switchboard is limited, the unistrut shall be installed below the floor level and
the cables shall be fixed to this unistrut with K-clamps.
3.4.3 Cable entry into enclosures with non-standard threads
Certain imported equipment is supplied by Others with enclosures having cable entries with other than
metric threads. To permit fitting of cable glands to SANS 1213 the Contractor shall supply and fit the
correct reducers from one type and size of thread to the other.
3.4.4 MV Terminations and earthing of single core cables
a. Approved termination kits for terminating MV cables shall be supplied. Care shall be taken to ensure
that the dimensions and procedures issued with the kit are adhered to.
b. Single core cables connecting between boards shall be single-point-earthed on the feeder side.
Cables connecting transformers to boards are single point earthed at the switchboard. Trefoil earth
tails shall be bonded together with the shortest possible earth strap to the earth bar.
c. Cable earth tails shall be long enough to connect directly to the earth bar without jointing.
3.4.5 LV Power cable terminations
Cables of larger rated areas terminated straight onto the terminals of the lowest drive compartment in a
MCC may give problems due to heat expansion. An S-bend or a complete loop shall be provided near
the termination so that expansion due to temperature changes does not stress the cable or terminal.
3.4.6 Battery terminations
Cables shall not be terminated directly onto terminals of larger batteries. All such battery connections
shall be terminated on approved wall-mounted battery termination stand-off plates. These copper plates
shall be mounted on stand-off insulators designed to take the weight and strains of the cable
terminations. The interconnection from the wall-mounted stand-off plate to the battery terminal shall be
made by means of solid copper bars.
3.4.7 Multi-core thermoplastic insulated cable terminations
Terminations shall as a minimum requirement comply with the drawing 0.00/10335. Spare cores (those
not connected to any terminal) shall be left long enough to reach the furthest terminal and is neatly
fastened, ferruled with the cable numbers and earthed on one side only, usually the outgoing side of the
cable. Lug/terminal combinations different from those shown on the standard drawing shall not be not
used without approval.
3.4.8 Mineral-insulated cable terminations
Cable terminations for mineral-insulated cables shall be made with a cold-seal compound and all cores
shall be insulated throughout their length with continuous neoprene or nylon sleeving. Terminations
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
having jointed or PVC sleeving shall not be acceptable. The termination shall be suitable for operation up
to 80oC.
3.4.9 Process control cable terminations
a. Control and instrument cable terminations shall comply with the drawing 0.00/10335.
b. The termination of control cables onto delicate control equipment shall be performed in accordance
with the special instructions from the respective process control equipment supplier.
c. Process control cable shall generally be terminated by using screw clamp type connections at the
field equipment end. Pre-insulated lugs shall be crimped onto stranded cores for screw clamp type
terminations, e.g. on line-up terminals.
d. Termination of cables onto line-up terminal strips
e. Wire trunking for internal wiring and for the safe routing of incoming cable cores to the terminal strips
shall be used in switchboards and large distribution boards. When trunking is not available or
economical, control (and smaller power) cabling shall be harnessed and secured in a neat manner.
f. Identification of cores by means of approved ferrules sized to suit the core diameter shall be
provided.
3.4.10 Earthing of equipment and cables
For detailed instructions on the earthing methods when terminating cables, screens etc, refer to the
standard, 36-131/132, “Earthing and lightning protection” as well as the earthing standards, 0.54/393.
3.4.11 Panel jumper wires
With certain items of equipment it may be necessary to interconnect terminals in the same, adjacent or
nearby panels using jumper wires of rated area up to 4 mm2. The necessary jumper wires complete with
ferrules and suitable lugs or terminating pins where necessary shall be supplied and installed. Lugs and
terminating pins and the crimping tool used to fix them to the wire shall be reviewed and approved by the
Engineer.
3.4.12 Cable lugs and crimping tools
a. The size of cable lugs shall be selected to fit the bare copper conductors on which they are used.
For conductors 0.5 to 6 mm2 pre-insulated crimping lugs as per drawing 0.00/10335 shall be used.
All small lugs shall be crimped by means of the correct crimping tools. Crimping tools shall either be
of the manual or hydraulic type. Only standard pre-fabricated crimp lugs shall be used. Cutting, re-
drilling and other site modifications shall not be allowed. Pre-insulated crimp lugs with unbrazed
barrels shall not be crimped sideways.
b. Larger cable lugs shall be to the SABS specification and drawing 0.54/5609, i.e. the material body of
lugs shall not be less than the rated area of the conductor. For carrying out compressed joints or
terminations on cables above 16 mm2 rated area a suitable hydraulic compression unit complete
with the necessary dies, compression head, hose and pump shall be used. Crimping dies shall
produce a hexagon shaped crimp. Crimps with a deep central indent in the lug shall not be
acceptable. The hydraulic pump unit and compression head must feature an interlocked valve
system which can only be released when the compression operation has been fully executed.
c. For high fault current applications above 40kA heavy duty lugs with double crimps shall be used.
d. Cable cutters shall be used to strip flexible stranded cable, not a hack saw as this creates distortion
in the cable.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.4.13 Supply of bolts and nuts
a. In many cases the equipment supplier shall provide only termination points without any other
hardware. In that case, the Contractor shall supply correctly dimensioned bolts, washers (contact,
flat and spring washers as required) and nuts.
b. Material for outdoor installations shall be hot-dip or electro galvanised. Material for indoor
terminations shall be cadmium plated and passivated.
3.4.14 Connection torque
a. Torque wrenches shall be used to tighten screw-joints of copper bars as well as bolting cable lugs
onto copper bars, battery terminating plates and motor terminals to consistent and repeatable
values.
b. High tensile bolts of tensile strength 8.8 (class 8G) and nuts of strength 5.5 (class 5D) shall be used.
Bolts with tensile strength 5.5 (class 5D) shall not be accepted. The Contractor supplies all bolts,
nuts, flat and spring or contact washers for terminating power cables onto boards and other
equipment, e.g. transformers.
c. The specified material shall be used for the types of connections as shown in the following table:
Table 5: Connection torque (A)
Materials and bolt sizes for different types of joints
Joint material bolt sizes
Copper bar joints hex bolt, 2 contact washers, nut M5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16
Cable lugs onto copper bar bolt, washer, contact washers, Cheese head: M4, 5, 6 Hex bolts:
nut M5, 6, 8, 10, 12
Copper bar, large transformer bolt, washer, contact washer M16, 20, 24, 30, 36
bushings
Two cable lugs front and back bolt, spring washer, washer- Cheese head: M4, 5, 6 Hex bolt:
onto copper bar washer, spring washer, nut 6, 8, 10
d. The torque values for the different bolt sizes are given in the following table:
Table 6: Connection torque (B)
Torque values
Thread Size 8.8 High tensile bolt Testing [Nm] 4.6 Brass/copper/copper alloy Testing [Nm]
Original tightening [Nm] bolts
Original tightening [Nm]
M4 1.8 1.5 - -
M5 5.0 4.3 2.5 2.12
M6 8.0 6.8 4.0 3.4
M8 20 17 8.0 6.8
M10 40 35 13.0 11
M12 70 60 20 17
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
M16 155 130 40 34
M20 480 410 - -
M24 835 710 - -
M30 1660 1410 - -
M36 2900 2460 - -
e. The above values shall be reached to within ± 10% tolerance and be witnessed during erection in
accordance with the quality check sheet.
f. For motor terminations with bolts and nuts of a lower tensile strength (4.6 and 4 respectively) of
brass and or copper/copper alloys lower torque values shall be used.
3.4.15 Cable lengths and through joints
3.4.15.1 Lengths and through joints
a. Full drum lengths of cable shall be used wherever possible. One through joint shall be accepted as
routine per standard drum length of cable or part thereof, measured along the approved route
between terminations. All other cases are treated as exceptions and approval is required before
through joints may be installed.
b. Through joints in protection cables and secondary CT or VT leads shall not be acceptable. No
through joints are permissible under any circumstances with screened instrumentation cables.
c. Where an LV cable run exceeds the maximum drum length, soldered resin encapsulated joints shall
be required.
3.4.15.2 Junction and reduction boxes
a. On long low voltage cable runs the volt drop consideration may require the use of cables with rated
areas one or more sizes above that which would normally suffice for given motor currents. It may
then become necessary to install cable junction boxes near the consumer and to install a short
length of cable with the smaller rated area to suit the termination box size of the motor. Such junction
(reduction) boxes shall be supplied in accordance with drawing 0.66/55342 for sizes of the larger
cable 50 to 185 mm2. The junction boxes shall be rated for the applicable fault current and have the
same ingress protection rating of the electrical equipment to which the cable is connected.
b. For cable sizes 35 mm2 and below standard Pratley or CCG through boxes of size three or smaller
(depending on cable size) fitted with three or four DIN or C rail mounted line up terminals shall be
installed. Details of the application area, size and type of box and the final connection between the
box and the electrical equipment shall be provided.
3.5 Cable ratings
3.5.1 General
a. The current ratings shall be based on the requirements of SANS 10198-4 and the recommendations
from the cable manufacturers for unarmoured cable with halogen-free, low smoke and fume, fire
retardant insulating compounds.
b. For armoured cables with PVC insulation and bedding, steel wire armour and fire retardant PVC
sheath separate tables contain the information for the respective current ratings.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
c. De-rating for bunching etc. to the conditions stated in Tables 10, 10a, 11, 11a, 12, 12a, 13 and 13a
are similarly based on factors given by SANS 10198-4 and the industry.
d. The mineral insulated cable ratings have been calculated from BICC Publication 592 adapting the
values given therein to the conditions in Table 4.
e. The Contractor shall submit these tables for the specific cables to be provided and submit this to the
Engineer for acceptance one month after contract award.
3.5.2 Overload protection of cables
a. Cables with thermoplastic insulation may sustain serious damage when subjected, even for short
periods, to temperatures in excess of those permissible for continuous operation. The maximum fuse
ratings as per Table 17 for unarmoured and Table 17A for armoured cables shall apply.
b. The full current rating for thermoplastic insulated cables corresponds for most compounds to the
continuous operating temperature of the conductors of 70oC. Accordingly, such cables may only be
operated at full rating as given in the tables if suitably protected against excess currents arising from
abnormal conditions. If the duration of such excess currents does not exceed four hours, protection
is considered to be adequate if the minimum current at which it is designed to operated does not
exceed 1.5 times the tabulated ratings where cables are laid in air or in ducts, and not more than 1.3
times the tabulated ratings where the cables are laid directly in the ground.
c. Where the circuit protection is such that operation of a cable at full rating is not permissible under the
foregoing provisions, the cable required for a given continuous load current shall be selected to have
a rating as given in the tables, which is not less than:
the given continuous load current,
for cables in air or ducts, 0.67 of the minimum current at which the excess current protection is
designed to operate, or
for cables laid directly in the ground, 0.77 of the minimum current at which excess protection is
designed to operate.
d. Most cables with thermoplastic insulation are fuse protected. The fusing factors (defined as the ratio
of rated minimum fusing current to the continuous current rating of the fuse) for fuses to SANS
60269, Low-Voltage Fuses, are as follows:
Table 7: Low-Voltage Fuses
Class of fuse to SANS 60269 fusing factor
P 1.00 - 1.25
Q1 1.25 - 1.5
e. Therefore for cables in air, the tabulated current ratings shall be used if the circuit is protected by a
Class Q1 fuse of continuous rating not exceeding that of the cable.
f. The following is a calculation as an example for unarmoured cable, Table 17. The installation details
are as follows:
Continuous load - 190 A, 3 phase 400 V.
Route - Buried in ground, one cable without others in parallel.
Fuse - 250 A, Class Q1.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
g. The minimum cable for the continuous load current as per Table 13 is 70 mm2 (rating of 236 A). The
fusing current as per the above table is 250 x 1.5 = 375 A. The minimum current rating of the cable,
protected against overloads is 375 x 0.77 = 290 A. It will therefore be necessary to use a 120 mm2
cable with a continuous rating of 322 A.
3.5.3 Fault current ratings
a. The fault current ratings for the different voltage levels used in the auxiliary power system are as
follows:
Table 8: Fault Current ratings
System fault current ratings
Voltage level Fault current
11 kV (specific boards) 40 kA
11 kV (general) 31.5 kA
6.6 kV 25 kA
400 V 50 kA
660 V 50 kA
220 V dc 10 kA
24 V dc 25 kA
b. The rated cross sectional areas for cables under the direct control of circuit breakers shall be chosen
to withstand a three-phase or DC through fault without damage for the total operating time of the
protection and circuit breaker. Where the circuit breaker is fitted with instantaneous over current
protection, the cable is suitable for carrying full load (continuously) or short circuit current for 0.2
seconds, whichever requires the larger cable. Note that in some applications i.e. loop supply cables
the short circuit current time requirement may be above 0.2 seconds up to 1 second. The Contractor
shall clarify this with the Engineer before the cable is designed.
c. Cables protected by fuses shall be fault protected if selected to carry full load current continuously
(see Tables 17 and 17A).
d. Table 16 details the heat balance formula used in calculating fault ratings, together with the
calculated fault ratings for selected total fault times. The information contained in this table has been
calculated in accordance with SANS 1507. The nominal core area has been used in the calculations.
e. The Contractor shall provide data specific to the cables used. 11.4 Voltage regulation
3.5.3.1 Regulation for different applications
a. The different voltage drops that are tolerated depend on the type of consumer that is supplied and
are as follows:
1.5% - For critical drives like standby jacking oil pumps or turbine barring gear, though operating
during start up and shut down only.
3% - For all drives, and other consumers operating continuously under normal operating conditions
of the station or a unit. This is applicable also for redundancy applications i.e. one out of two situation
as for belt drives and for the coal mills which is a four out of five mills requirement at unit MCR.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
5% - For all drives and other consumers operating intermittently only under normal operating
conditions of the station or a unit. This can include drives like actuators, valve drives, shuttle heads,
soot blowers and precipitator rapper motors.
5% - For all drives operating continuously for a number of hours but during start up and shut down of
a unit only and for motor heaters used only at standstill.
5% - For all DC operated solenoid circuits with the full continuous solenoid operating current flowing.
b. With regard to the above limits, discretion is used in marginal cases when selecting cables because
of voltage drops, in particular with larger rated areas.
3.5.3.2 Voltage drop curves
a. The Contractor shall compile the voltage drop curves and the associated design criteria that shall be
used for the sizing of cables. This shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance after the
Contract has been awarded. The following curves (as a minimum) shall be compiled in an Excel
spread sheet and the curves plotted:
Table 9: Voltage Drop Curves
Curves for unarmoured lv-cables laid in air:
Sheet 1 - 1,5% 24 v dc
Sheet 2 - 3%
Sheet 3 - 5%
Sheet 4 - 1,5% 220 v dc
Sheet 5 - 3%
Sheet 6 - 5%
Sheet 7 - 1,5% 230 v ac
Sheet 8 - 3%
Sheet 9 - 5%
Sheet 10 - 1,5% 400 v ac
Sheet 11 - 3%
Sheet 12 - 5%
Sheet 13 - 1,5% 660 v ac
Sheet 14 - 3%
Curves for unarmoured hv-cables laid in air:
SHEET 15 - 1,5% 6,6 kV
SHEET 16 - 1,5% 11 kV
Curves for armoured lv-cables laid in air:
Sheet 17 - 1,5% 24 v dc
Sheet 18 - 3%
Sheet 19 - 5%
Sheet 20 - 1,5% 220 v dc
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
Sheet 21 - 3%
Sheet 22 - 5%
Sheet 23 - 1,5% 230 v ac
Sheet 24 - 3%
Sheet 25 - 5%
Sheet 26 - 1,5% 400 v ac
Sheet 27 - 3%
Sheet 28 - 5%
Curves for armoured mv-cables laid in air:
SHEET 30 - 1,5% 6,6 kV
SHEET 31 - 1,5% 11 kV
Curves for armoured lv-cables in ground:
Sheet 32 - 1,5% 230 v ac
Sheet 33 - 3%
Sheet 34 - 5%
Sheet 35 - 1,5% 400 v ac
Sheet 36 - 3%
Sheet 37 - 5%
Curves for armoured mv-cables in ground:
SHEET 38 - 1,5% 6,6 kV
SHEET 39 - 1,5% 11 kV
b. The following cable design criteria shall be provided by the Contractor and agreed with the Engineer:
The horizontal portion of the curves is determined by current carrying limitations only, assuming
cables are in a single layer.
The current derating according to derating Tables 10 to 14 must be considered besides the volt drop
for all bunched cables, otherwise the maximum permissible operating temperature of cables may be
exceeded as a result of restricted heat-loss dissipation. This shall be indicated on the curves.
The curve portions that mean that the current is limited by volt drop considerations only shall be
indicated on the curves.
For a cable or trefoil group laid in sleeve pipes up to 15 m length current carrying capacity of that
cable laid in air or ground, i.e. immediately before or after the sleeved section shall be used in
determining current limits.
For a cable or trefoil group laid in sleeve pipes longer than 15 m the current limit as per derating
Tables 10 to 14 must be updated with the specific cable specification and applied.
For cables laid in trenches in the HV Yard continuous current limits for cables laid in air (at 30°C)
must be reduced by 15% as air temperatures in these shallow trenches can reach approximately
40°C.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.6 Intermediate cable storage at site
a. The Contractor shall utilize the allocated site office area. The cable storage area shall be fenced in
and used as the secure store. In this area cable drums may be stored for extended periods during
the progressing construction of the power station, which takes several years.
b. New and opened drums shall be protected against climatic influences. Drums shall not be stored
directly on the ground but rather on wooden or other beams to permit drainage of rainwater and
prevent rotting of the drums. Drums shall be rotated through 180o on a yearly basis. To prevent
ingress of moisture and therefore corrosion, cable ends on returned drums may not be left open. The
sealing of the cable ends shall be by means of heat shrink caps.
c. As protection of the outer cable layer against UV-radiation, slats shall not be removed from unused
drums. Drums returned to the store after usage shall be protected again on return against
deterioration of the outer cable layer through UV-radiation by means of temporary protection like
tarpaulins, partial covering with slats or by moving it indoors.
3.7 Sealing of holes in floors and walls and fire barriers
3.7.1 Coating of cables in vicinity of fire barriers
To increase the fire survivability of the installation fire retardant coatings shall be applied onto certain
critical cable runs as well as at all cable entries though fire barriers or building walls. The coating shall be
applied over a distance of five metres from both sides of the barrier or wall.
3.7.2 Fire barriers
a. Fire barriers shall be installed wherever electrical cables pass through wall, floors and ceilings,
inside low and medium voltage switchboards, generator protection panels, battery chargers, UPSs’
which are boundary elements of a specified fire zone. Fire barriers shall be in accordance with GGS
0183 and SANS 10142-1.
b. Fire barriers have a fire rating of two hours minimum in compliance with the fire resistance criteria for
insulation, stability and integrity as specified by recognised testing institutions and their standards.
c. Test certificates are provided with fire barriers in accordance with:
SANS 10177-2, Fire testing of materials, components and elements used in buildings Part 2: Fire
resistance test for building elements.
IEEE 634: 1978, Testing for Fire Rated Penetration Seals.
ASTM E814: Fire Test of through Penetration Fire Stops.
3.7.3 Sealing of opening in floors and walls
a. Wherever cables pass through holes or slots in floors and walls or enter or leave sleeve pipes in
floors or walls; the openings shall be sealed with vermiculite plaster or other material approved by
the Engineer. This material shall be domed or slightly raised towards the centre to prevent the
accumulation of water or oil in the seal. The sealing material shall be water resistant and provides a
barrier for smoke and toxic fumes.
b. Waterproof fire seals are separately priced and only installed in places indicated by the Employer.
c. In the case where cable sheaths are incompatible with barrier material, the cable shall be protected
through the floor or wall by instamatic paint so that the sealing material is not in direct contact with
the cable at any point.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
This document is a standard for the procurement of power station low voltage electric motors. The
requirements in this standard shall be followed to ensure that the Eskom motor design base is
maintained.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This standard specifies the minimum Eskom’s requirements for the procurement, design, manufacture,
testing, transport, delivery, installation and commissioning of new low voltage electric motors.
2.1.1 Purpose
The objectives of this standard are to:
a. Provide a source of information for Power Station personnel when purchasing reliable low voltage
motors for either replacing the existing motors or spares or for new plants.
b. Provide material that should be agreed upon and/or exchanged between the Employer (Eskom) and
the Supplier. Such material includes technical schedules, quality control and assurance, tests and
data packs.
c. Ensure that the Employer receives and accepts a high quality asset that is efficient, reliable and
maintainable throughout its intended service life.
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Limited Divisions.
a. The requirements are for the procurement and supply of new motors whose voltage rating is below
1000V.
b. There may be additional requirements with regard to electrical and mechanical components for
motors to be used with variable speed drives or at nuclear sites or specialized operating systems
and environments. The standard elements of this standard should, however, still be applicable and
useful to specialized motors. It is understood that some elements of this standard may be adapted
and additional information added through the scope of work for specialized motors and applications.
c. This standard takes precedence over any other standards mentioned in 2.2.
2.1.3 Exclusions
a. Detailed requirements for motors to be procured for specialized applications and environments.
b. While this standard contains quality control and assurance requirements, it does not cover all
material and workmanship issues that shall be addressed by the Supplier and/or OEM through a
duly certified ISO 9001:2008 quality management system.
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
2.2.1 Normative
[1] Low Voltage Induction Motors Technical Schedule A&B Template Document number 240-
77100923
[2] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
2.2.2 Informative
[3] Eskom 240-56361435:Rev. 0 2009, Transport of Power Station Electric Motors
[4] Eskom 240-56360387: Storage of Power Station Electric Motors
[5] SANS 1804-1:2007, IEC Requirements.
[6] SANS 1804-2:2007, Low voltage three-phase standard motors.
[7] SANS 1804-4:2006, Single phase motors.
[8] SANS IEC 60034-1:2006, Rotating electrical machines. Part 1: Rating and performance.
[9] SANS IEC 60034-2-1:2008, Rotating electrical machines. Part 2: Standard methods of determining
losses and efficiency from test (excluding machines for traction vehicles).
[10] SANS IEC 60034-5:2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 5: Degrees of protection provided by
the integral design of rotating electrical machines. (IP Code)- Classification.
[11] SANS IEC 60034-6:1991, Rotating electrical machines. Part 6: Methods of cooling. (IC code).
[12] SANS IEC 60034-7:2001, Rotating electrical machines. Part 7: Classification of types of
construction, mounting arrangements and terminal box position. (IM Code).
[13] SANS IEC 60034-8:2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 8: Terminal markings and direction of
rotating of rotating machines.
[14] SANS IEC 60034-9: 2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 9: Noise limits.
[15] SANS IEC 60034-11: 2005, Rotating electrical machines. Part 11: Thermal protection.
[16] SANS IEC 60034-12:2008, Rotating electrical machines. Part 12: Starting performance of single-
speed three-phase cage induction motors.
[17] SANS IEC 60034-14:2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 14: Mechanical vibration of certain
machines with shaft heights 56mm and higher – Measurement, evaluation and limits of vibration
severity.
[18] SANS IEC 60034-17:2006, Rotating electrical machines. Part 17: Cage Induction motors when fed
from converters- Application guide.
[19] SANS IEC 60034-26: 2006, Rotating electrical machines. Part 26: Effects of unbalanced voltages
on the performance of three-phase cage induction motors.
[20] SANS IEC 60034-28: 2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 28: Test methods for determining
quantities of equivalent circuit diagrams for three-phase low-voltage cage induction motors.
[21] SANS IEC 60034-30: 2008, Rotating electrical machines. Part 30 Efficiency classes of single-
speed, three-phase, cage-induction motors (IE-code).
[22] SANS IEC 60072-1:1991, Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines. Part 1:
Frame numbers 56 to 400 and flange numbers 55 to 1080.
[23] SANS IEC 60072-2:1990, Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines. Part 2:
Frame numbers 355 to 1000 and flange numbers 1180 to 2360.
[24] SANS 1091:2004, National colour standards for paint.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
[25] IEEE 112: 2004, IEEE standard test procedure for polyphase induction motors and generators
[26] The South African grid code –Network code Rev. 8.
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
Controlled Disclosure Controlled Disclosure to external parties (either enforced by law, or discretionary).
Employer The Eskom business unit purchasing electrical motors to which this document is
applicable.
Supplier The company performing the scope of work as per this standard.
2.3.1 Classification
Controlled Disclosure: Controlled Disclosure to External Parties (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
IE International Efficiency – efficiency Class
IE1 Standard efficiency (equivalent to EFF2)
IE2 High efficiency (equivalent to EFF1)
IE3 Premium efficiency
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers.
IR Insulation resistance.
LV Low Voltage.
PI Polarisation index
SANS South African National Standards
2.5 Roles and responsibilities
None
2.6 Process for monitoring
None
2.7 Related/supporting documents
The requirements in this standard supersede the low voltage requirements in 240-56357518.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3. Procurement of power station low voltage motors standard
3.1 Technical requirements
3.1.1 General Requirements
a. All motors shall be designed, manufactured, tested and perform in accordance with the latest
revision of SANS IEC 60034 and also comply with this standard.
b. The motor Supplier shall take into consideration all relevant characteristics and operating conditions
pertaining to the driven machine and the motor environment and shall be responsible for designing
or selecting from a standard range, a motor that will perform as required by the purchaser.
c. The preference is for motors to be selected from a standard range. Where this is not possible, the
Employer shall be notified for approval on non-standard motor design. For replacements, the
responsible person shall make sure that the new motor is interchangeable with the old motor or as
stated in the contract.
d. Only service proven designs (all components) shall be tendered. If a design has a component/s that
has/ve not been proven for at least two years in service, the affected parts and the extent of their
experience shall be declared in the tender/proposal.
e. Motors shall not be under-loaded (e.g. loading below 75%) unless otherwise specified in Appendix
C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923) and is required by the application. The
loading of 75% of rated output power and above (75% - 90%) is required for better efficiency, power
factor and power utilization. The design shall have reasonable design margin of at least 10% to
accommodate power supply variations in Appendix C: Technical Schedule-A&B, reduced cooling
and system inefficiency during the life of the plant.
f. A minimum efficiency class code of IE3 for S1 duty and intermittent duty with 80% or higher cyclic
duration factor motors shall be supplied for new plants and replacements. Reliable motors with high
efficiency, high power factor and low input power consumption values are required to support the
Eskom Energy Efficiency drive.
g. Electric motors for converter applications shall be selected and sized to accommodate additional
losses and stresses associated with converters (electric drives) in order to maintain the motor
service life.
h. The Supplier to confirm all the interfacing with related equipment and subcontractors to ensure the
motor will function reliably within the required environment. The Employer to be made aware of all
shortcomings and risks which may affect the functioning of the motor.
3.1.2 Electrical Details
3.1.2.1 Motor Rating
a. The motor ratings shall be specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-
77100923) of an enquiry document.
b. Motor voltage and power ratings shall be in accordance with Appendix A unless otherwise specified
in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923) or if the application requires an
optimized/economic solution which differs from Appendix A requirements.
c. The kilowatt (kW) rating of each motor shall not be less than the maximum operating design loading
(in kW) of the driven machine.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.1.2.2 Power Supply Variation
a. The standard parameters of the power supply system (Grid Code requirement) under normal and
abnormal conditions are listed in Appendix C. Motors shall be suitable for use on the system
specified for the particular application.
b. Under normal power supply conditions, motors shall be capable of:
b1. Running continuously at rated output without exceeding the temperature rises permitted in
3.1.2.3b as per SANS IEC 60034-1,
b2. The specified number of starts per hour and momentary overload in accordance with SANS
IEC 60034-1 without exceeding the motor insulation class temperature rise.
c. Under sustained abnormal conditions specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template
240-77100923), motors shall be capable of starting and driving the driven equipment without
exceeding the motor insulation class temperature rise.
d. Under transient abnormal conditions specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template
240-77100923), motors shall continue operating without damage and without exceeding the motor
insulation class temperature rise.
3.1.2.3 Temperature Class Limits
a. The stator windings shall be insulated with a Class F (155°C) or higher insulation system such a
Class H (180°C).
b. The winding temperature rise at rated output shall not exceed 80K above the maximum
coolant/ambient temperature of 40oC (Class B Insulation temperature rise) measured using the
resistance method. This is applicable for both Direct-on-Line and converter-driven motors.
3.1.2.4 Starting Current Requirements
a. Motors shall be suitable for direct-on-line starting unless otherwise specified in Appendix C
Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
b. Motors shall be designed for at least three consecutive starts per hour when initially cold. Motors
shall be designed for at least two consecutive starts per hour when hot.
c. Valve actuator motors, boiler damper motors, float operated motors and motors used for control and
regulating functions shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour.
d. The direct-on-line starting currents for cage induction motors under normal conditions on the
specified power supply shall not exceed the following values:
e1. 8 per unit for standard motors (IE1),
e2. 9 per unit for high efficient motors (IE2) and premium efficiency motors (IE3).
Lower starting currents are preferred. Motors with lower starting currents, high efficiency and high power
factor shall be considered.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.1.2.5 Starting Torque Requirements
a. Motors shall be capable of accelerating the driven load from standstill to full speed and operate the
driven equipment taking into account the load inertia, load torque, and power supply variations
provided in this standard.
b. Unless otherwise specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923), the
pull-up torque and breakdown torque shall not be less than the values specified in SANS IEC
60034-12.
c. The minimum difference between the motor torque and load torque under normal supply condition
shall not be less than 10% at any speed to avoid stalling during starting.
3.1.2.6 Tolerance
Motor efficiencies, power factors and torques guaranteed by suppliers shall not be subject to decreases
in respect of tolerances of any kind. Similarly, guaranteed starting currents shall not be subject to
increases for any reason.
3.1.3 Mechanical Details
3.1.3.1 Inter-Changeability of Parts
All corresponding parts of all motors of the same type and size from the same manufacturer shall be
interchangeable.
3.1.3.2 Stator Windings and Insulating System
a. Vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) stator windings are preferred. The continuous resin flow
process is also acceptable. Any other winding impregnation system should be approved by the
Employer.
b. End-windings shall withstand direct-on-line starting under maximum voltage conditions.
c. The connections between the windings and terminals shall carry the maximum starting current for
the worst case run-up time without overheating, and shall withstand the forces arising from the
starting current without damage.
d. Motors for converter applications shall be supplied with insulation system that can withstand voltage
spikes, rise time and harmonics without damage or loss of life.
3.1.3.3 Stator Core and Winding
a. The stator core and winding of motors 55kW and above shall be constructed as a separate entity
thus allowing for easy repair and replacement of the winding if necessary.
b. The core laminations shall have no ragged edges before stacking.
3.1.3.4 Rotor, Shaft and Coupling
a. Die-cast aluminium, Die-cast copper and fabricated copper rotors are allowed.
b. For copper bar rotors, the laminations shall be fixed to the shaft so that the maximum torque is
transmitted without distortion of, and without separation between, the rotor laminations.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
c. For copper bar rotors, precautions shall be taken for the case where a rotor bar breaks that it will not
come out of the rotor slot and damage the stator winding.
d. Unused shaft extensions shall be enclosed in robust metal covers.
e. Shaft ends shall be protected from corrosion.
f. Dimensions of shaft ends and keys shall comply with the relevant standards in Section 2.2.
g. When the complete coupling for each motor drive is provided by the Supplier of the driven machine,
the motor manufacturer shall be responsible for its fitting and balancing.
3.1.3.5 Bearings
a. In general, motor bearings and lubrication shall be of the same type as those of the driven machine.
b. The bearing type shall be anti-friction (ball or roller) bearing unless otherwise specified in Appendix
C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
c. Ball and/or roller bearings shall be conservatively loaded: grease renewal periods shall be not less
than 4000 hours. Grease relief devices shall be provided to prevent over-greasing and shall
discharge excess grease external to the motor from an easily accessible position.
d. The greasing arrangements for ball and roller bearings shall be such that greasing can be carried
out safely while the motor is running. Greasing facilities shall be easily accessible when the motor is
in service.
e. The life of ball/roller bearings, calculated by an approved method, shall be at least 40 000 hours
(L10). Air Cooled Condenser (ACC) motors shall have at least 100 000 hours (L10).
f. Motor with frame size up to 180 may include life-lubricated tight bearings that require no
maintenance throughout its service life.
g. Motors for converter applications shall be supplied with insulated bearings to limit circulating
currents.
h. The bearing for immersed motors may be lubricated by the fluid conveyed.
3.1.3.6 Enclosure and Cooling
a. Motors shall be of standard dimensions as specified in relevant standards in Section 2.2
b. All motors for use in hazardous area (e.g. oil pumps) shall be non-sparking, flame-proof and
explosion-proof.
c. Separate motor driven fans for motor cooling will not be accepted unless in low speeds converter
application. Approval is required from the Employer. Motor oversizing to cater for low speed
converter application is the preferred option.
d. The motor housings for power station motors shall be made of either cast iron or fabricated steel.
Aluminum motors will only be considered for small motors outside the cast iron frame range.
e. Vertical motors shall be provided with cowls to prevent the accumulation of foreign matter and water
on the motor.
f. The enclosures (IP code) for general purpose indoors motors, outdoor motors, and material handling
(coal and ash) plant shall be as stated in Appendix B.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
g. Cooling methods shall be as stated in Appendix B unless otherwise specified in Appendix C:
Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
3.1.3.7 Terminal Boxes
a. Motors shall be provided with approved terminating fittings for the required cables. Where a
particular type and size of motor is supplied for several different applications, the arrangement of
cable terminating fittings shall permit inter-changeability of motors and allow one spare motor to
serve for all applications without having to modify the existing cable arrangement.
b. Horizontal motors smaller than 355 frame sizes may be fitted with terminal boxes that allow cable
entry from any one of four positions, 90 ° apart, on top of the motor.
c. Terminal boxes shall be provided complete with the internal parts. The cable glands plugs shall be
fitted in the cable entries. Cable glands shall be supplied if requested in the enquiry document.
d. Terminal box lids shall be with “lips” over the terminal box flange, so that the gasket will not be
exposed to water and dust.
e. Cable tail support bars within the terminal boxes shall be made from non-hygroscopic insulating
material.
f. The dimensions of terminal boxes and cable boxes shall be adequate for accommodating the sizes
and types of cable specified. The design of the terminal box shall permit the removal of the motor
without the need to disturb the termination or bend the cable appreciably.
g. All auxiliary terminal boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the circuits for which they are
provided. Labels shall be of brass or stainless steel with permanent markings, and shall be securely
attached to the motor.
3.1.3.8 Motor Terminals, Connections and Rotation
a. Main terminals and motor leads shall be permanently marked with the letters U-V-W, reading from
left to right, if horizontally arranged, or top to bottom, if vertically arranged, when facing the terminal
box.
b. Internal leads to reverse the motor rotation shall be easily interchangeable.
c. Motors with only one shaft extension shall rotate in a clockwise direction when looking on the drive
end, irrespective of the direction of rotation required on site, when the U-V-W supply leads of a
phase rotation system rising in that order, are connected to the motor terminals U-V-W respectively.
d. Each motor shall be provided with an earth terminal mounted.
e. For motors rated above 550 V, the leads between the motor windings and terminals shall pass
through bushes or sealing devices to separate the motor interior from the terminal box.
3.1.3.9 Rating Plate and Labels
a. The rating plate shall give the information specified in SANS 1804 and IEC 60034-30.
b. All information on the rating plate or any other plate detailing information shall be marked
permanently on securely attached brass or stainless steel plates
c. In addition to the information shown on the rating plate, the following information, if not included in
the rating plate, shall be included separately on the motor casing,
c1. make and type of bearings;
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
c2. grade and type of lubricating oil/grease;
c3. recommended greasing intervals;
c4. bearing reference numbers for ball/roller bearings;
c5. permissible starting intervals.
c6. the IE code and efficiency shall be durable marked on the rating plate
c7. the SABS mark.
3.1.3.10 Corrosion Protection and Paint Finishes
3.1.3.10.1 Paint Finishes
a. The internal surfaces of terminal boxes and motor frames shall be given an approved corrosion-
proofing treatment.
b. All external surfaces for new manufactured designs shall be finished with an outer coat of enamel of
the colour specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923). Off the
shelve motors can be supplied with their original colours.
c. Any standard painting procedure that differs from these requirements shall be submitted to the
Employer for prior approval.
3.1.3.10.2 Noise and Vibration
a. The noise levels shall not exceed the levels given in SANS IEC 60034-9.
b. Levels of vibration generated within motors when running on their own shall not exceed the levels
given in SANS IEC 60034-14.
3.1.4 Accessories
3.1.4.1 Temperature Measuring Devices
a. At least one dual type thermistor shall be provided on all crane motors, actuator motors and other
short-time rated motors that could overheat as a result of the driven device jamming. The
thermistors shall work with the protection relays provided by the Supplier of the control gear.
b. Should there be abnormal alarm and trip requirements, the motor Supplier shall be responsible for
informing the Employer of the required alarm and trip settings for the equipment monitoring the
thermistors, ETD or thermocouples.
c. The thermistors, ETD or thermocouples shall be fitted in a separate terminal box. Terminal boxes
shall be clearly labelled to indicate the circuits for which they are provided. Labels shall be of brass
or stainless steel with permanent markings, and shall be securely attached to the motor.
3.1.4.2 Space Heaters
a. Space heaters are only required for motors exposed to low temperatures or high humidity areas
which could results in condensation during standby operation or outage. The Employer Engineer
has to approve the installation of heaters in critical and non-critical motors depending on the
prevailing conditions. Motors that come standard with space heaters are acceptable.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
b. The space heaters shall be designed to operate on 230V AC.
c. Separate terminal boxes are preferred. Terminal boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the
circuits for which they are provided. Labels shall be of brass or stainless steel with permanent
markings, and shall be securely attached to the motor.
3.2 Quality assurance and testing
3.2.1 Quality of Material and Workmanship
a. All material shall be new and of the quality required. Unless otherwise specified or approved all
material shall comply with the most recent South African Standards applicable or better.
b. No welding, burning in, filling, plugging up or metal deposition to correct defects in any component
will be permitted unless agreed to by the Employer in writing, following an inspection of the defect by
the Employer or its authorized representative.
3.2.1.1 Inspection and Testing
3.2.1.1.1 Inspection and Witnessing of Tests
a. The contractor shall give the Employer not less than seven days’ notice of when the inspection may
be undertaken. Motors despatched to site without the required inspection, may be returned at the
Supplier’s cost, at the Employer’s discretion or as stated in the contract.
b. For motors of 200 kW and larger, an inspection and test plan shall be submitted for approval or as
stated in the contract.
c. Type tests shall be witnessed by the Employer and/or an authority, independent of the Supplier or
contractor or as stated in the contract.
3.2.1.1.2 Type Tests
a. The first motor of each size and type manufactured shall be performance tested to prove compliance
with the quoted performance. Type test certificates on identical motors may, at the Employer’s
discretion, be accepted in lieu of these tests.
b. All performance tests shall be in accordance with SANS IEC 60034-1 and SANS 1804. The
permissible temperature rise motors shall be in accordance with the limits specified in clause 4.2.3
The temperature rise of the stator windings shall be measured by the winding resistance method
3.2.1.1.3 Routine Tests
a. Each motor shall be tested at the manufacturer’s works for no load current, vibration, locked rotor,
insulation resistance, high voltage and winding resistances.
b. All motors larger than 200 kW shall be subjected to a no load bearing run for long enough to allow
the bearing temperatures to reach equilibrium.
All routine tests shall be in accordance with SANS IEC 60034-1 and SANS 1804.
3.2.1.1.4 Test Certificates
a. The routine and type test certificates shall be submitted to the Employer for approval 30 days before
the delivery date of the motors.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
b. Type test certificates shall show power factor and efficiency figures calculated from the test results
for 100 %, 75 % and 50 % of full load conditions.
c. Motor test results shall be recorded on the Employer standard form. The Supplier’s template is
acceptable if it is comprehensive and covers all the details required by the Employer.
3.2.2 Delivery, Erection and Commissioning
a. Delivery, erection and commissioning arrangement shall be as per contract conditions and agreed
by both parties.
b. Motors shall not be delivered without agreement of readiness to receive them. Motors delivered
without such approval may be returned at the Supplier’s expense for later delivery at no extra cost to
the purchaser.
c. Where erection and commissioning are specified in the contract, the following requirements shall be
met.
3.2.2.1 Erection
a. When the motors are erected, care shall be taken to ensure interchange-ability with replacement
motors.
3.2.2.2 Bearing Inspection
All motor bearings shall be inspected by the Employer’s representative on site. On motors fitted with
ball/roller bearings, the grease shall be examined prior to commissioning to ensure that it is not hard. If
no roughness is felt when the shaft is rotated by hand and if the motor runs without undue noise or
vibration, the bearings will be considered acceptable. If the bearings fail or exhibit the symptoms of
brinelling during the guarantee period they shall be replaced by the contractor, free of charge and
without delay.
3.2.2.3 Alignment
a. The motors, base plates and embedded parts shall be positioned by the party specified in the
contract
b. After erection, the alignment of the half-couplings between the motor and the driven machine shall
be measured.
3.2.2.4 Drying Out
a. The contractor shall satisfy himself that each motor is dry before it is connected to the supply. Any
motor that fails as a result of being commissioned in a damp condition shall be repaired at the
expense of the contractor responsible for commissioning.
b. Equipment and personnel to do the drying-out shall be provided by the contractor responsible for
commissioning.
c. Failure of the contractor to achieve approval of the dry-out shall entitle the Employer to reject the
motor concerned.
d. Motors ordered as spares shall be delivered to the specified store and need not be dried out by the
Contractor provided the motors meet the approved criteria before despatch or on delivery, at the
Employer’s discretion.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.3 Documentation
3.3.1 Motor Documentation Requirement at Tender Phase
Detailed information and drawings to enable the Employer to make a complete and fair technical
analysis of the tender/s shall be supplied for the proposed motor design. The required details shall
include but not limited to the following:
a. Preliminary outline drawing indicating motor mounting dimensions, shaft height, shaft diameter and
coupling detail, maximum overall dimensions, weight for total motor.
b. A completed Technical Schedule-A&B in Appendix C.
c. Grid code compliance requirements in Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
3.3.2 Motor Documentation Requirement After Contract Award.
The following information shall be provided by the Supplier to the Employer for detailed design review,
comment, and acceptance:
a. Detail outline drawing indicating certified motor mounting dimensions, shaft height, shaft diameter
and coupling detail, maximum overall dimensions, weight for total motor, interface location for
terminal boxes (main power supply, auxiliary, and accessories). The rated kW output, speed, supply
voltage, line current, frequency and phases shall be clearly shown.
b. Detailed drawings of the motor base plate showing full construction details with dimensions (where
applicable).
c. Power winding diagrams and connection diagrams for auxiliaries (heaters, thermistors, PT100, etc).
d. A completed version of Technical Schedule-A&B that shall, where necessary, show revised data
due to the motor detailed design.
e. Torque and Current versus Speed Curves for the motor at 100% and 90% motor rated voltage for
motor. The torque versus speed curves shall include the driven load torque versus speed curve to
show accelerating torque margins for motors 55 kW and above.
f. Efficiency and Power Factor versus Load Curves from 50% to 100% load, in 25% increments, at
rated voltage.
g. Thermal limit curves for motors 55kW motors and above.
h. Start-up times and stall times of the motor at 100% and 90% of the rated voltage.
i. Nameplate drawing with all details to be contained therein.
j. A Quality Control, Inspection and Test Plan for Employer review, influence and approval.
k. An equivalency/interchangeability review for the new versus existing motor designs.
No manufacturing or delivery of motors should be allowed before the designs are finalized and accepted
by the Employer. The Employer has the right to reject any motor delivered to site without the signed
documentation mentioned above at the Supplier‘s cost
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.3.3 Motor Documentation Requirement prior to scheduled delivery
Information shall be submitted to the Employer for review and approval, and to prepare for motor
installation and commissioning.
a. A copy of Installation, Operating and Maintenance Manual. Information contained in this manual
shall include but not limited to:
a1. Installation instructions.
a2. Operating instructions, including starting limitations.
a3. Maintenance requirements and data.
a4. Instructions on how to completely disassemble and assemble the motor for major inspections,
repairs and overhauls.
a5. Replacement parts catalogue.
a6. Storage requirements.
a7. Trouble shooting guide.
b. Required Type test certificates and Routine certificates.
c. All signed drawings specified as required in 3.3.2
d. Signed Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
e. Signed Torque vs. speed curves and current vs. speed curves. Signed Efficiency and Power factor
vs. load curves. Signed Thermal limit curves for 55kW motors and above
f. Signed Quality control plan.
The Employer has the right to reject any motor delivered to site without the documentation mentioned
above at the Supplier‘s cost
3.4 Labelling
All labels shall be in English and the wording is subject to Employer’s approval. Abbreviations to
descriptions shall not be acceptable. Where abbreviations are unavoidable due to database field
length limitations or limited number of characters available on labels, the abbreviations shall be in
accordance with the Employer’s abbreviation standard. Labels for removable items shall be mounted
alongside the item, and not fixed to the item itself.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
4. Authorisation
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Gert Brink Arnot Power Station – Motor Engineer
Riaan Grobler Camden Power Station – Motor Engineer
Bright Nelufhangani Duvha Power Station – Motor Engineer
Mthokozi Ngwane Hendrina Power Station – Motor Engineer
Tose Tose Komati Power Station – Motor Engineer
Daan Dreyer Kriel Power Station – Motor Engineer
Buhle Nyembe Lethabo Power Station – Motor Engineer
Sabelo Nene Tutuka Power Station – Motor Engineer
Nonkululeko Mabaso Manager Engineering - Electrical Design Application CoE
Dyke Monyane Group Technology Electrical – LV Switchgear Engineer
5. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
November 2012 0.1 MJ Manyage Draft Document for review created from 474-235
May 2013 1 MJ Manyage Final Document for Publication
July 2016 1.1 MJ Manyage 1. Changes from Specification to Standard and Title
2. Changes in title page signatories from TDAC to SCOT
3. Appendix C Template removed and referenced as a
separate Approved Template 240-77100923 to avoid
duplication.
July 2016 2 MJ Manyage Final Document for Authorisation and Publication Rev 2
September 2018 2.1 MJ Manyage Changes in Table 2, Appendix B. No Review completed
September 2018 3 MJ Manyage Final Document for Authorisation and Publication Rev 3
6. Development team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
Sithembile Tshanini Group Technology – Electrical
Buhle Nyembe Lethabo Power Station – EPE
Gert Brink Arnot Power Station – EPE
Marubini Manyage Group Technology – Electrical
Mosiwa Maibi Kriel Power Station – EPE
Verwey Fourie Komati Power Station – CED
7. Acknowledgements
None
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix a: motor voltages
A.1 Motor voltages are normally based on the following table, but shall be as specified in Technical
Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923) of an enquiry document. Cable types and sizes shall be as
specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
Table 1: Motor Voltages
Rated output Voltage rating
All AC motors below 1 kW 230V/400 V
1 kW to 200 kW 380V/400 V
or
1 kW to 355 kW 525V/660V/690V
A.2 New (or upgrade) application requirements may deviate from this range. A life cycle cost shall be
done for new applications and has to be approved by the Employer Engineer
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix b: motor rating classes
B.1 The following table reflects the usual rating class, type of enclosure, and method of cooling
applicable to motors for particular duties. The minimum enclosure rating shall be IP55. The dusty
environments enclosure rating shall be IP65.
Table 2: Motor Rating Classes, Enclosures and Cooling Methods
1 2 3 4
Cooling
Motors for Rating class Type of enclosure
method
a. Boilers Bulk oil pumps
(S1/S3) IC 411 For Zone 1: Flame-proof (Ex d)
For Zone 2: Non-sparking (Ex nA)
b. Turbo-generators Oil pumps (S1/S3) IC 411
For Zone 1: Flame-proof (Ex d)
For Zone 2: Non-sparking (Ex nA)
c. Coal, ash, lime and soda IP65 for non-classified areas
plant material handling
(S1/S3) ic 411
For Zone 21: Dust Ignition proof (Ex tD IP65)
For Zone 22: Dust Ignition proof (Ex tD IP65)
d. General purpose (S1/S3) IP 55 IC 411
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix c: technical schedule a&b
Refer to Low Voltage Induction Motors Technical Schedule A&B Template Document number 24077100923
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix d: standard form for type test certificates
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix e: standard form for routine test certificates
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix f: deviation schedule
Deviation schedule
1. Any deviations/modifications/alternatives offered to the standard 240-57617975 shall be listed
below with reasons for the departures.
2. No deviations/modifications/alternatives offered to the standard will be recognised unless listed on
this schedule.
If no deviations/modifications/alternatives are offered, this schedule must be marked N/A.
Standard Standard
Page number Clause number Proposed deviation/modification/alternative
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix g: motor document submittal programme
Low voltage motor documentation requirements
Document submittal programme project activity
Review review review review review review review documents details of activities testing freeze tendering installation handover pre-enquiry design inspection/release maintenance pre-commissioning acceptance
& Final
Fat
Document
ID description type
1 Motor technical requirements (Works Information) soft copy E E
240-77100923: LV Motor IM Technical Schedule A&B
2 Template (Completed Schedule A) soft copy E E
240-57617975: New Low Voltage Motors Procurement
Standard 3 soft copy E E
4 240-56360387: Storage of Electric Motors Standard soft copy E E
240-56361435: Transport of Power Station electric motors
standard 5 soft copy E E
Preferred motor suppliers/vendors list (Applicability based
E e
6 on contract strategy) soft copy
Tender Returnable (Preliminary)
Completed Motor Technical Schedule A&B Hard and
7 7.1 Template 240-77100923 soft copy T
Hard and
7.2 Dimension outline drawings soft copy T
Final Design Documents (for review before
manufacturing)
Completed Motor Technical Schedule A&B Hard and
8.1 Template 240-77100923 soft copy C
Hard and
8.2 Motor torque-speed curves for all motors soft copy C
Motor torque-speed curves superimposed on Hard and
8.3 driven machine load curves for 55kW and above soft copy C
8 Hard and
C
8.4 Motor current-speed curves soft copy
Thermal-time curves (Motor damage curves for Hard and
C
8.5 55kW and above) soft copy
Hard and
C
8.6 Detail Dimension outline drawings soft copy
Hard and
8.7 Power winding diagrams soft copy C
Auxiliaries connection diagrams (thermistors, Hard and
8.8 heaters, PT100, etc.) soft copy C
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Quality control plan (For all Motors above Hard and
8.9 200kW) soft copy C
Manufacturing, Transportation and Storage (for review
before equipment release)
Hard and
9.1 Type test report soft copy C
Hard and
9 9.2 Routine test report soft copy C
Hard and
9.3 Transport and storage procedures soft copy C
Hard and
9.4 Installation, operating and maintenance manuals soft copy C
Motor Data Pack (final equipment documentation - Hard and
Signed copies) soft copy
Completed Motor Technical Schedule A&B Hard and
10.1 Template 240-77100923 soft copy C C
Motor torque-speed, current-speed, speed-time, Hard and
10.2 thermal-time curves soft copy C C
Hard and
10.3 Dimension Outline Drawings soft copy C C
Hard and
10.4 Power winding diagrams soft copy C C
Auxiliaries connection diagrams (thermistors, Hard and
10 10.5 heaters, PT100, etc.) soft copy C C
Hard and
10.6 Quality control plan soft copy C C
Hard and
10.7 Type test report soft copy C C
Hard and
10.8 Routine test report soft copy C C
Hard and
10.9 Transport and storage procedures soft copy C C
Hard and
12.10 Installation, operating and maintenance manuals soft copy C C
Commissioning
Hard and
11.1 Commissioning procedure soft copy C C
Hard and
11.2 Pre-, cold and hot commissioning report soft copy C C
C – Contractor
E - Employer
O - Others
T - Tenderer
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
The need arose to consolidate all Eskom Drawing Office Standards to improve and streamline
consistency in the Engineering Divisions.
SmartPlant is being deployed at Eskom to manage technical data and documents related to power
Generation plants.
Distribution and Transmission plants are not in scope for the current programme.
An engineering drawing, a type of technical drawing, is used to fully and clearly define requirements for
items to be engineered or manufactured.
Engineering drawing (the activity of drafting) produces engineering drawings. More than merely the
drawing of pictures, it is also a type of language, a graphical language that communicates ideas and
information from one mind to another. Most importantly, it communicates all needed information from the
engineer who designed a part to the people who will make it.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This document defines general rules and code of practices to be followed by all designers and drafters to
produce design drawings of consistent and professional quality. The accuracy and adequacy of the
design and drafting work and its compliance with the applicable standards remain the responsibility of
the designer or draftsperson. Nothing contained in this standard shall be construed as relieving the
designer or drafter of the individual responsibility for producing quality drawings.
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to define the standard and requirements that must be followed by all
internal Eskom Drawing offices(s) and Contractors, for production and control of all Eskom Drawings
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Soc Ltd – Generation, Plant Engineering and All
Eskom Contractors
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
2.2.2 Informative
[2] 240-83904158 – CADD Office Workflow Guideline
[3] 240-85194150 – EPSS CADD Office Work Request form
[4] 32-6 Eskom Documentation Management Procedure
[5] 36-1 Standard for Management Systems Document, Correspondence and Records
[6] 36-2 Writing and Controlling Management Systems Documents
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
[7] 240-109607662 Eskom Plant Labelling Abbreviation Standard
[8] 240-71432150 Plant Labelling Standard
[9] 240-73143217 Eskom RDS-PP Coding Standard
[10] 240-93576498 KKS Coding Standard
[11] 240-109607942 Eskom RDS-PP Key Part Standard
[12] 240-58552870 SmartPlant for Owner Operators (SPO) Document Metadata Standard
[13] 240-110409882 Functional Specification for SharePoint Portal in support of SPO Transmittal
Management
[14] 240-110409934 User Requirements Specification (URS) for a Collaboration Platform to
supplement SmartPlant
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
As Built Drawing Drawing which is verified as an exact representation of a plant or a section of
a plant that has been completely built.
Check Print Drawing which is printed and utilized for verification of a drawing during the
drawing checking procedure.
Contractor A party appointed by Eskom to render services.
Data Mining For the purposes of this standard Data Mining shall be the extraction of Text
Tagged data from Computer-aided Drafting (CAD) drawings.
Controlled Copy A copy of a document held by a documentation/satellite centre or by a
designated individual that has the guarantee that it is the latest and current
valid revision. This copy shall be clearly stamped in red ‘CONTROLLED
COPY’. All controlled documents that are printed will be considered valid for a
maximum period of 24 hours. Users shall always reference back to the EDMS
for the latest version of a document.
Deviation/Notification Process This process is the initiator of engineering activities to permanently address
plant deficiencies or incidents.
Draftsperson A person responsible for the creation and updating of drawings, in
accordance with this standard.
Functional Process Flow Diagram showing all or a recognizable portion of the process, complete with a
Diagram (FPFD) material and/or heat balance sheet. It contains details of operating
parameters such as flow rate, temperature and pressure.
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram which shows limited details of the mechanical and electrical
Diagram (P&ID) components, pipework and ducting, and identifies all the measuring points
and control elements that are necessary to measure and control that process.
Plant System A collection of plant components connected in such a way that each will
perform a unique process, thereby achieving specified performance
parameters.
Preliminary A drawing which is produced to convey ideas and proposals prior to approval
and which has not been accepted for construction. The approved Preliminary
drawings are used for the implementation on site, there after the as built
drawings will be marked up and updated.
Primary Process Flow Diagram Diagram which indicates the major process as well as the process values
(PPFD) through all or most of the main plant items of a given power station or system.
Project Configuration Files The customized set-up files that must be utilized in conjunction standard
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Definition Description
Eskom tools Piping and Instrumentation Diagram/Process and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID).
Secondary Process Flow Secondary process flow diagram is similar to the Primary Process Flow
Diagram (SPFD) Diagram (PPFD), except that it only deals with one particular system or
subsystem of plant, and in more detail.
Text Tagging For the purposes of this standard Text Tagging shall be the process of adding
electronic text tags into a CAD drawing for the purpose of data mining.
2.3.1 Disclosure Classification
Public Domain: Published in any public forum without constraints (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
AKZ Anlagen Kenn Zeichnungs System (Identification System for Power Stations)
BU Business Unit
CAD Computer Aided Drafting
DGN Bentley MicroStation Drawing File Extension
DWG/DXF- AutoCAD Drawing File Extensions
ECSA Engineering Council South Africa
EDMS Electronic Document Management System
EPSS Engineering Process & System Support
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IT Information Technology
KKS Kraftwerk Kennzeichen System (Identification System for Power Stations)
MDL Master Document List
MWP Megawatt Park
NCR Non-conformance Report
NEC New Engineering Contract
OHSA Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1993
PBS Plant Breakdown Structure
PDF Adobe Portable Document Format
Pr Eng Professional Engineer registered in terms of the Engineering Profession Act, 2000
RDS-PP Reference Designation Systems for Power Plant (Wind Farm)
RFQ Request for Quote
RFT Request for Tender
SoW Scope of Work
TIC Technical Information Change
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
2.5 Related/supporting documents
2.5.1 Related Work Instructions
36-944 Latest General Standard Instruction for General Drawing Software Configuration
36-945 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for P&ID Drafting
36-946 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for Electrical Drafting
2.5.2 Superseded Standards
The following Eskom Standards are superseded by this document.
Document No. Title
167A/143 Drawing Office Practice
GGG 0450 Guideline to Acceptance of Contract Drawings
GGS 0182 Process Flow Diagrams and Piping Instrumentation Diagrams
GGS 0315 Standard Drawing Practice
GGS 0441 Drawing Records System
GSE/94/Y004 Standard Drawing Practice
36-943 Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation Standard
45-698 Engineering Computer Aided Design Drafting Standard
2.5.3 Consolidated Reference Standards
This document combined with the following standards and standard instructions:
Document Revision Title
No.
36-943 Latest Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation
Standard
3. General drawing standard
3.1 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to define the requirements that must be followed by Eskom drawing
office(s) and Contractor’s drawing office staff when producing drawings for Eskom. The section
specifically defines the procedures and standards for an electronic drawing office.
3.2 Scope
This section specifies the procedures and standards that must be adhered to while compiling and
distributing engineering drawings and associated engineering documentation.
General Drawings are seen as drawings of General Arrangement, Sectional Views and Detail Drawings
of the following:
Architectural
Civil
Structural
Mechanical
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Machining
Welding Instructions
Piping
Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC)
Electrical
Lighting & Small Power
Control and Instrumentation (C&I)
Text Tagging of existing drawings for data mining
Mapping GIS
3.3 Codification
See Coding Standard for respective divisional codification requirements.
3.4 Cad software requirement
Eskom standard CAD software to be used both internally and externally. (Microstation and SmartPlant
Enterprise)
3.5 Documentation
The requirements for specific drawing documents are specified in the following paragraphs.
All drawings produced by Eskom and/or any of its contractors shall adhere to South African law and
standards that are in force when the drawing is produced. This includes but is not limited to the use
of internal approved standards.
Drafting of General Drawings, including Text-Tagged Drawings shall be done in accordance with this
standard.
General Drawings shall be produced on the appropriate document size that will ensure legibility and
clarity of users on the contents of the drawings.
The following best practice shall be applied in the creation of drawings:
Drawings shall be properly planned and produced to ensure ease of interpretation and read-ability.
Typical details are not to be duplicated. Appropriate references shall be used in the main drawing to
indicate repetition of any typical details.
The use of unnecessary views shall be eliminated.
Application of a constant set of scales on sets of drawings.
Avoidance of odd scales, use the most common scales such as 1:1, 1:50, 1:20, 1:10, 1:2, 2:2
Provision of cross-reference information shall be provided on drawings, i.e. reference to other
drawings as well as to design information/manuals as appropriate.
Manufacturer’s information and datasheets shall be provided in a software format and version
specified by Eskom.
3.6 Classifcation of drawings
a) Drawings shall be classified according to the following information classification levels:
i. Class 1
Secret: Only for use within specified segments in the organization
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
ii. Class 2
Confidential: May not be disclosed outside of Eskom – represents a competitive advantage for
the business.
iii. Class 3
Controlled Disclosure: Internal Information – controlled disclosure to any external parties –
either enforced by law or discretionary
iv. Class 4
Public Domain/Non-classified: Published in any public forum without constraints, either enforced
by law or discretionary
b) This classification shall form part of the document record Meta data and user access to the
drawing(s) will be restricted accordingly.
3.7 Drawing change request
All Eskom drawing offices as well as Contractor’s drawings offices shall comply with the respective
Divisional Work Instructions. This shall be documented clearly and must comply with Eskom’s minimum
change control rules.
For drawing changes a request and scope of work is supplied by the customer to the CADD Office.
EPSS CADD Office Work Request form (240-85194150) will be completed in full and returned to
customer for approval of time and costs. The customer will sign acceptance and return to the CADD
office for commencement of work. On completion of work the draftsperson will send a copy to the
customer for checking and approval. Once all work is complete the customer will receive a signed copy
of the drawings and on receipt of these will sign off the original request form, that he received all work as
per original request. The draftsperson shall send the drawings for archiving and storage.
3.8 Drawing workflow
The issuing, updating and creating of drawings shall be done in accordance with the generic workflow as
per attached in (240-83904158) or to a specific Divisional requirement.
3.9 Request for drawings
Should any drawing be required by a Contractor or third party, the Eskom Non-Disclosure Confidentiality
Agreement form must be signed off by the Contractor or third party and sent to the designated Eskom
Drawing Office Document Controller prior to the drawing being issued?
3.10 Issuing of drawings/transmittals
During plant design and development, as well as operations and maintenance of a plant, it is expected
that numerous projects would be initiated for various purposes. These projects typically involve thirdparty contractors (EPCs, vendors, etc.), who work with and generate Eskom information. The exchange
of information between Eskom and third-parties is typically carried out through Transmittal events. These
Transmittals, as well as the associated drawings and documents, are captured in SmartPlant for Owner
Operators (SPO) either as Incoming Transmittals (information being submitted to Eskom by third-party
contractors), or as Outgoing Transmittals (information being submitted by Eskom to third-party
contractors).
In order to centralise the storage and dissemination of information submitted to Eskom as part of
transmittals, the business adopts a centralised collaboration platform where such information can be
managed effectively prior to loading to the relevant destination system (SPO, Hyperwave, etc.).
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Microsoft ® SharePointTM (“SharePoint”) will be leveraged to enhance Transmittal Management, by
providing a supplemental platform for receiving information submitted to Eskom through traditional
channels (hard-copy, CD/flash drives, email) as well as a new mechanism for direct upload of
information to Eskom. The information is required to be managed prior to loading into the relevant
destination system. SharePoint will also serve as an externally accessible platform to enhance the
security and traceability of data submission to third-party contractors once downloaded from the source
Eskom system, and to automate the submission of a download link to the third party contractor.
Generation Technology makes use of a SharePoint Transmittal Management system.
Acknowledgement of receipt will happen automatically within the SharePoint environment. See Doc
Number 240-110409882 and 240-110409934 for further details.
Third-party contractors’ will continue to submit files in hard copy or on removable media (e.g. CD) to
Eskom due to file sizes, network constraints, etc. that prevent the submission of information to Eskom
via email channels or through the new SharePoint site.
3.11 Issuing of new drawing numbers
a) Request for drawing number shall be requested in writing to the designated Eskom Document
controller. All drawing numbers will be centrally allocated for all plants and projects with a
designated document/drawing controller that will assign the drawing numbers.
b) Under no circumstance will the requester be allowed to change drawing titles or the drawing for a
purpose other than what was requested, without approval from Eskom allocated document
controllers.
3.12 Superseded or cancelled drawings
a) A superseded drawing is one that is no longer in use.
b) It is important to note that when a drawing has been registered and an identification number has
been allocated, this cannot be changed once it has been distributed or authorized. This changed
status of the document must be captured in the MRI (master Record Index) of drawings for the
relevant status, and if it is a controlled copy, the necessary notification that the drawing has been
cancelled or superseded must be issued as part of the process. All superseded drawings shall be
marked clearly ‘superseded by the new drawing number’. Conversely, a drawing which supersedes
another must clearly state the number of that drawing which it supersedes. A revision must be
added.
c) All superseded or cancelled drawings are to be retained in the archive system.
d) A superseded or cancelled drawing numbers shall never be used for any other created drawings.
These numbers will remain dormant.
e) If drawing number are allocated as a batch the requestor must provide Eskom with a Fully Detailed
MDL providing all the required meta-data needed to complete the drawing record in the SPO
system.
3.13 Drawing checking procedure
The following is a guideline to be followed to check all drawings:
a) Once the draftsperson has completed a drawing, a check print must be issued to the responsible
engineer or Chief Draftsperson. The check print must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
The responsible engineer or Chief Draftsperson must check the drawing against the relevant
marked up drawing. This should be done with the relevant stakeholders to ensure due process and
standards have been applied and the physical drawing content is acceptable. If the electronic
functionality like SPO “View and Mark-up” are used the same rules for mark/correction will apply.
Checks include:
i. With the codification officer to ensure that all tagged items comply with the site codification
system as required.
ii. The check by an alternate draftsperson is performed to ensure that the drawing standards are
adhered to and that all the marked-up items have been incorporated as required.
iii. A standard checklist for drawings APPENDIX B: DRAWING CHECKLIST shall be used as a
basis for checking that the drawing standards are adhered to.
iv. The checks done by the Drawing Office checkers, the data controllers and the responsible
engineer are to ensure that the design changes are incorporated as required.
v. Once the responsible engineer or draftsperson has completed checking a drawing, the check
print must be signed and dated and the full name of the checker must be recorded on the
drawing.
vi. The drawing must then be returned to the responsible draftsperson. All discrepancies or queries
must be clearly marked up utilizing the following colour code system, and reviewed with the
responsible draftsperson:
Red - Corrections or Add info
Yellow - Delete
Blue - Comments (will not be drafted)
Green - Correct
b) The draftsperson must back-draft the ‘CHECK PRINT’ drawing and reissue the drawing to the
responsible engineer or DO Supervisor as a revised ‘CHECK PRINT’ for rechecking. Once no more
discrepancies are marked up on the ‘CHECK PRINT’ by the responsible engineer or DO Supervisor
and he/she has signed off the drawing, the drawing is ready for issue to Eskom for the required
approval.
c) If required, the drawing must be issued to Eskom for checking in accordance with paragraph 3.11
d) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be issued together with a Transmittal Form
relating to the drawings. Issues that arise that Eskom must be resolve a NCRs must be created for
all drawings, capturing each and every issue that can be resolved.
e) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
f) A responsible engineer or draftsperson to check the drawing and resolve all the items listed on the
Ncr.
g) If required, the drawing must be issued to the Contractor drawing or responsible Drawing Office for
updating/back-drafting
h) Once a checked drawing is received, the responsible draftsperson will review any non-conformance
marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR with Eskom if required, and revise the drawing
accordingly.
i) The drawing must then be rechecked in accordance with this procedure.
[15] Once all the drawing’s non-conformances marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR have
been resolved by Eskom, the drawing will be reviewed, authorized and approved in accordance
with the applicable workflow stipulated in 240-83904158 - CADD Office Workflow Guideline.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.14 Nonconformance reporting
To be done according to Eskom Approved NCR process as outlined by ISO9001.
3.15 Electronic format of drawings issued to ESKOM
a) All drawings submitted to Eskom shall comply with Eskom Standard drawing applications version, at
that specific time.
b) All drawings must be issued to Eskom in both native CADD format and PDF/TIF format.
c) Drawings issued to Eskom may not be “Write Protected” or encrypted as Eskom has to do the
necessary configuration management on these documents upon receipt.
3.16 Registration of drawings
a) All drawings must be registered by Eskom on the Electronic Document Management System
(EDMS) See paragraph 6.1 Minimum Drawing Meta-data required. See Doc 240-58552870
b) Contractors shall maintain a Drawing Register which records at least the following information in line
with SPO/EDMS requirements:
Eskom Drawing Number.
Contractor Drawing Number
Eskom Change Request Number.
Drawing Title.
Filename.
Contractor Revision.
Eskom Revision.
c) The Contractor’s drawing register must be made available to Eskom for audit on request.
3.17 Revision control
The drawing revision shall be clearly identified by placing a Revision Triangle and Revision Letter or
Number, in the revised area(s) of the drawing. A brief but informative statement of the revision made,
and where applicable the appropriate change order, project or other reference code, shall be shown in
revision block. It is to be noted NO preceding “0” is required before revs 0-9. The system sequentially
counts for this.
3.17.1 Drawing and Revision Status
Rev 0 Rev 1 Rev 2
Iteration Action Document
Rev State Rev State Rev State
State
0 New Document is Reserved Working
1 Sign Off Document Issued Current
2 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Current Working
3 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Current
4 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Superceded Current Working
5 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Superceded Current
See Document 240-58552870
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.17.2 Drawing Status Stamps
The use of drawing “status stamps” a watermark, rubber stamp, or cell may be used. Only the following
list of stamps shall be used:
Preliminary
Issued for contruction
As built
Controlled copy
Superseded
Cancelled
Controlled Copy
Issued to:
Date of Issue:
Check print
The need arose to consolidate all Eskom Drawing Office Standards to improve and streamline
consistency in the Engineering Divisions.
SmartPlant is being deployed at Eskom to manage technical data and documents related to power
Generation plants.
Distribution and Transmission plants are not in scope for the current programme.
An engineering drawing, a type of technical drawing, is used to fully and clearly define requirements for
items to be engineered or manufactured.
Engineering drawing (the activity of drafting) produces engineering drawings. More than merely the
drawing of pictures, it is also a type of language, a graphical language that communicates ideas and
information from one mind to another. Most importantly, it communicates all needed information from the
engineer who designed a part to the people who will make it.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This document defines general rules and code of practices to be followed by all designers and drafters to
produce design drawings of consistent and professional quality. The accuracy and adequacy of the
design and drafting work and its compliance with the applicable standards remain the responsibility of
the designer or draftsperson. Nothing contained in this standard shall be construed as relieving the
designer or drafter of the individual responsibility for producing quality drawings.
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to define the standard and requirements that must be followed by all
internal Eskom Drawing offices(s) and Contractors, for production and control of all Eskom Drawings
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Soc Ltd – Generation, Plant Engineering and All
Eskom Contractors
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
2.2.2 Informative
[2] 240-83904158 – CADD Office Workflow Guideline
[3] 240-85194150 – EPSS CADD Office Work Request form
[4] 32-6 Eskom Documentation Management Procedure
[5] 36-1 Standard for Management Systems Document, Correspondence and Records
[6] 36-2 Writing and Controlling Management Systems Documents
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
[7] 240-109607662 Eskom Plant Labelling Abbreviation Standard
[8] 240-71432150 Plant Labelling Standard
[9] 240-73143217 Eskom RDS-PP Coding Standard
[10] 240-93576498 KKS Coding Standard
[11] 240-109607942 Eskom RDS-PP Key Part Standard
[12] 240-58552870 SmartPlant for Owner Operators (SPO) Document Metadata Standard
[13] 240-110409882 Functional Specification for SharePoint Portal in support of SPO Transmittal
Management
[14] 240-110409934 User Requirements Specification (URS) for a Collaboration Platform to
supplement SmartPlant
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
As Built Drawing Drawing which is verified as an exact representation of a plant or a section of
a plant that has been completely built.
Check Print Drawing which is printed and utilized for verification of a drawing during the
drawing checking procedure.
Contractor A party appointed by Eskom to render services.
Data Mining For the purposes of this standard Data Mining shall be the extraction of Text
Tagged data from Computer-aided Drafting (CAD) drawings.
Controlled Copy A copy of a document held by a documentation/satellite centre or by a
designated individual that has the guarantee that it is the latest and current
valid revision. This copy shall be clearly stamped in red ‘CONTROLLED
COPY’. All controlled documents that are printed will be considered valid for a
maximum period of 24 hours. Users shall always reference back to the EDMS
for the latest version of a document.
Deviation/Notification Process This process is the initiator of engineering activities to permanently address
plant deficiencies or incidents.
Draftsperson A person responsible for the creation and updating of drawings, in
accordance with this standard.
Functional Process Flow Diagram showing all or a recognizable portion of the process, complete with a
Diagram (FPFD) material and/or heat balance sheet. It contains details of operating
parameters such as flow rate, temperature and pressure.
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram which shows limited details of the mechanical and electrical
Diagram (P&ID) components, pipework and ducting, and identifies all the measuring points
and control elements that are necessary to measure and control that process.
Plant System A collection of plant components connected in such a way that each will
perform a unique process, thereby achieving specified performance
parameters.
Preliminary A drawing which is produced to convey ideas and proposals prior to approval
and which has not been accepted for construction. The approved Preliminary
drawings are used for the implementation on site, there after the as built
drawings will be marked up and updated.
Primary Process Flow Diagram Diagram which indicates the major process as well as the process values
(PPFD) through all or most of the main plant items of a given power station or system.
Project Configuration Files The customized set-up files that must be utilized in conjunction standard
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Definition Description
Eskom tools Piping and Instrumentation Diagram/Process and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID).
Secondary Process Flow Secondary process flow diagram is similar to the Primary Process Flow
Diagram (SPFD) Diagram (PPFD), except that it only deals with one particular system or
subsystem of plant, and in more detail.
Text Tagging For the purposes of this standard Text Tagging shall be the process of adding
electronic text tags into a CAD drawing for the purpose of data mining.
2.3.1 Disclosure Classification
Public Domain: Published in any public forum without constraints (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
AKZ Anlagen Kenn Zeichnungs System (Identification System for Power Stations)
BU Business Unit
CAD Computer Aided Drafting
DGN Bentley MicroStation Drawing File Extension
DWG/DXF- AutoCAD Drawing File Extensions
ECSA Engineering Council South Africa
EDMS Electronic Document Management System
EPSS Engineering Process & System Support
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IT Information Technology
KKS Kraftwerk Kennzeichen System (Identification System for Power Stations)
MDL Master Document List
MWP Megawatt Park
NCR Non-conformance Report
NEC New Engineering Contract
OHSA Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1993
PBS Plant Breakdown Structure
PDF Adobe Portable Document Format
Pr Eng Professional Engineer registered in terms of the Engineering Profession Act, 2000
RDS-PP Reference Designation Systems for Power Plant (Wind Farm)
RFQ Request for Quote
RFT Request for Tender
SoW Scope of Work
TIC Technical Information Change
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
2.5 Related/supporting documents
2.5.1 Related Work Instructions
36-944 Latest General Standard Instruction for General Drawing Software Configuration
36-945 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for P&ID Drafting
36-946 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for Electrical Drafting
2.5.2 Superseded Standards
The following Eskom Standards are superseded by this document.
Document No. Title
167A/143 Drawing Office Practice
GGG 0450 Guideline to Acceptance of Contract Drawings
GGS 0182 Process Flow Diagrams and Piping Instrumentation Diagrams
GGS 0315 Standard Drawing Practice
GGS 0441 Drawing Records System
GSE/94/Y004 Standard Drawing Practice
36-943 Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation Standard
45-698 Engineering Computer Aided Design Drafting Standard
2.5.3 Consolidated Reference Standards
This document combined with the following standards and standard instructions:
Document Revision Title
No.
36-943 Latest Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation
Standard
3. General drawing standard
3.1 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to define the requirements that must be followed by Eskom drawing
office(s) and Contractor’s drawing office staff when producing drawings for Eskom. The section
specifically defines the procedures and standards for an electronic drawing office.
3.2 Scope
This section specifies the procedures and standards that must be adhered to while compiling and
distributing engineering drawings and associated engineering documentation.
General Drawings are seen as drawings of General Arrangement, Sectional Views and Detail Drawings
of the following:
Architectural
Civil
Structural
Mechanical
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Machining
Welding Instructions
Piping
Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC)
Electrical
Lighting & Small Power
Control and Instrumentation (C&I)
Text Tagging of existing drawings for data mining
Mapping GIS
3.3 Codification
See Coding Standard for respective divisional codification requirements.
3.4 Cad software requirement
Eskom standard CAD software to be used both internally and externally. (Microstation and SmartPlant
Enterprise)
3.5 Documentation
The requirements for specific drawing documents are specified in the following paragraphs.
All drawings produced by Eskom and/or any of its contractors shall adhere to South African law and
standards that are in force when the drawing is produced. This includes but is not limited to the use
of internal approved standards.
Drafting of General Drawings, including Text-Tagged Drawings shall be done in accordance with this
standard.
General Drawings shall be produced on the appropriate document size that will ensure legibility and
clarity of users on the contents of the drawings.
The following best practice shall be applied in the creation of drawings:
Drawings shall be properly planned and produced to ensure ease of interpretation and read-ability.
Typical details are not to be duplicated. Appropriate references shall be used in the main drawing to
indicate repetition of any typical details.
The use of unnecessary views shall be eliminated.
Application of a constant set of scales on sets of drawings.
Avoidance of odd scales, use the most common scales such as 1:1, 1:50, 1:20, 1:10, 1:2, 2:2
Provision of cross-reference information shall be provided on drawings, i.e. reference to other
drawings as well as to design information/manuals as appropriate.
Manufacturer’s information and datasheets shall be provided in a software format and version
specified by Eskom.
3.6 Classifcation of drawings
a) Drawings shall be classified according to the following information classification levels:
i. Class 1
Secret: Only for use within specified segments in the organization
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
ii. Class 2
Confidential: May not be disclosed outside of Eskom – represents a competitive advantage for
the business.
iii. Class 3
Controlled Disclosure: Internal Information – controlled disclosure to any external parties –
either enforced by law or discretionary
iv. Class 4
Public Domain/Non-classified: Published in any public forum without constraints, either enforced
by law or discretionary
b) This classification shall form part of the document record Meta data and user access to the
drawing(s) will be restricted accordingly.
3.7 Drawing change request
All Eskom drawing offices as well as Contractor’s drawings offices shall comply with the respective
Divisional Work Instructions. This shall be documented clearly and must comply with Eskom’s minimum
change control rules.
For drawing changes a request and scope of work is supplied by the customer to the CADD Office.
EPSS CADD Office Work Request form (240-85194150) will be completed in full and returned to
customer for approval of time and costs. The customer will sign acceptance and return to the CADD
office for commencement of work. On completion of work the draftsperson will send a copy to the
customer for checking and approval. Once all work is complete the customer will receive a signed copy
of the drawings and on receipt of these will sign off the original request form, that he received all work as
per original request. The draftsperson shall send the drawings for archiving and storage.
3.8 Drawing workflow
The issuing, updating and creating of drawings shall be done in accordance with the generic workflow as
per attached in (240-83904158) or to a specific Divisional requirement.
3.9 Request for drawings
Should any drawing be required by a Contractor or third party, the Eskom Non-Disclosure Confidentiality
Agreement form must be signed off by the Contractor or third party and sent to the designated Eskom
Drawing Office Document Controller prior to the drawing being issued?
3.10 Issuing of drawings/transmittals
During plant design and development, as well as operations and maintenance of a plant, it is expected
that numerous projects would be initiated for various purposes. These projects typically involve thirdparty contractors (EPCs, vendors, etc.), who work with and generate Eskom information. The exchange
of information between Eskom and third-parties is typically carried out through Transmittal events. These
Transmittals, as well as the associated drawings and documents, are captured in SmartPlant for Owner
Operators (SPO) either as Incoming Transmittals (information being submitted to Eskom by third-party
contractors), or as Outgoing Transmittals (information being submitted by Eskom to third-party
contractors).
In order to centralise the storage and dissemination of information submitted to Eskom as part of
transmittals, the business adopts a centralised collaboration platform where such information can be
managed effectively prior to loading to the relevant destination system (SPO, Hyperwave, etc.).
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Microsoft ® SharePointTM (“SharePoint”) will be leveraged to enhance Transmittal Management, by
providing a supplemental platform for receiving information submitted to Eskom through traditional
channels (hard-copy, CD/flash drives, email) as well as a new mechanism for direct upload of
information to Eskom. The information is required to be managed prior to loading into the relevant
destination system. SharePoint will also serve as an externally accessible platform to enhance the
security and traceability of data submission to third-party contractors once downloaded from the source
Eskom system, and to automate the submission of a download link to the third party contractor.
Generation Technology makes use of a SharePoint Transmittal Management system.
Acknowledgement of receipt will happen automatically within the SharePoint environment. See Doc
Number 240-110409882 and 240-110409934 for further details.
Third-party contractors’ will continue to submit files in hard copy or on removable media (e.g. CD) to
Eskom due to file sizes, network constraints, etc. that prevent the submission of information to Eskom
via email channels or through the new SharePoint site.
3.11 Issuing of new drawing numbers
a) Request for drawing number shall be requested in writing to the designated Eskom Document
controller. All drawing numbers will be centrally allocated for all plants and projects with a
designated document/drawing controller that will assign the drawing numbers.
b) Under no circumstance will the requester be allowed to change drawing titles or the drawing for a
purpose other than what was requested, without approval from Eskom allocated document
controllers.
3.12 Superseded or cancelled drawings
a) A superseded drawing is one that is no longer in use.
b) It is important to note that when a drawing has been registered and an identification number has
been allocated, this cannot be changed once it has been distributed or authorized. This changed
status of the document must be captured in the MRI (master Record Index) of drawings for the
relevant status, and if it is a controlled copy, the necessary notification that the drawing has been
cancelled or superseded must be issued as part of the process. All superseded drawings shall be
marked clearly ‘superseded by the new drawing number’. Conversely, a drawing which supersedes
another must clearly state the number of that drawing which it supersedes. A revision must be
added.
c) All superseded or cancelled drawings are to be retained in the archive system.
d) A superseded or cancelled drawing numbers shall never be used for any other created drawings.
These numbers will remain dormant.
e) If drawing number are allocated as a batch the requestor must provide Eskom with a Fully Detailed
MDL providing all the required meta-data needed to complete the drawing record in the SPO
system.
3.13 Drawing checking procedure
The following is a guideline to be followed to check all drawings:
a) Once the draftsperson has completed a drawing, a check print must be issued to the responsible
engineer or Chief Draftsperson. The check print must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
The responsible engineer or Chief Draftsperson must check the drawing against the relevant
marked up drawing. This should be done with the relevant stakeholders to ensure due process and
standards have been applied and the physical drawing content is acceptable. If the electronic
functionality like SPO “View and Mark-up” are used the same rules for mark/correction will apply.
Checks include:
i. With the codification officer to ensure that all tagged items comply with the site codification
system as required.
ii. The check by an alternate draftsperson is performed to ensure that the drawing standards are
adhered to and that all the marked-up items have been incorporated as required.
iii. A standard checklist for drawings APPENDIX B: DRAWING CHECKLIST shall be used as a
basis for checking that the drawing standards are adhered to.
iv. The checks done by the Drawing Office checkers, the data controllers and the responsible
engineer are to ensure that the design changes are incorporated as required.
v. Once the responsible engineer or draftsperson has completed checking a drawing, the check
print must be signed and dated and the full name of the checker must be recorded on the
drawing.
vi. The drawing must then be returned to the responsible draftsperson. All discrepancies or queries
must be clearly marked up utilizing the following colour code system, and reviewed with the
responsible draftsperson:
Red - Corrections or Add info
Yellow - Delete
Blue - Comments (will not be drafted)
Green - Correct
b) The draftsperson must back-draft the ‘CHECK PRINT’ drawing and reissue the drawing to the
responsible engineer or DO Supervisor as a revised ‘CHECK PRINT’ for rechecking. Once no more
discrepancies are marked up on the ‘CHECK PRINT’ by the responsible engineer or DO Supervisor
and he/she has signed off the drawing, the drawing is ready for issue to Eskom for the required
approval.
c) If required, the drawing must be issued to Eskom for checking in accordance with paragraph 3.11
d) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be issued together with a Transmittal Form
relating to the drawings. Issues that arise that Eskom must be resolve a NCRs must be created for
all drawings, capturing each and every issue that can be resolved.
e) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
f) A responsible engineer or draftsperson to check the drawing and resolve all the items listed on the
Ncr.
g) If required, the drawing must be issued to the Contractor drawing or responsible Drawing Office for
updating/back-drafting
h) Once a checked drawing is received, the responsible draftsperson will review any non-conformance
marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR with Eskom if required, and revise the drawing
accordingly.
i) The drawing must then be rechecked in accordance with this procedure.
[15] Once all the drawing’s non-conformances marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR have
been resolved by Eskom, the drawing will be reviewed, authorized and approved in accordance
with the applicable workflow stipulated in 240-83904158 - CADD Office Workflow Guideline.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.14 Nonconformance reporting
To be done according to Eskom Approved NCR process as outlined by ISO9001.
3.15 Electronic format of drawings issued to ESKOM
a) All drawings submitted to Eskom shall comply with Eskom Standard drawing applications version, at
that specific time.
b) All drawings must be issued to Eskom in both native CADD format and PDF/TIF format.
c) Drawings issued to Eskom may not be “Write Protected” or encrypted as Eskom has to do the
necessary configuration management on these documents upon receipt.
3.16 Registration of drawings
a) All drawings must be registered by Eskom on the Electronic Document Management System
(EDMS) See paragraph 6.1 Minimum Drawing Meta-data required. See Doc 240-58552870
b) Contractors shall maintain a Drawing Register which records at least the following information in line
with SPO/EDMS requirements:
Eskom Drawing Number.
Contractor Drawing Number
Eskom Change Request Number.
Drawing Title.
Filename.
Contractor Revision.
Eskom Revision.
c) The Contractor’s drawing register must be made available to Eskom for audit on request.
3.17 Revision control
The drawing revision shall be clearly identified by placing a Revision Triangle and Revision Letter or
Number, in the revised area(s) of the drawing. A brief but informative statement of the revision made,
and where applicable the appropriate change order, project or other reference code, shall be shown in
revision block. It is to be noted NO preceding “0” is required before revs 0-9. The system sequentially
counts for this.
3.17.1 Drawing and Revision Status
Rev 0 Rev 1 Rev 2
Iteration Action Document
Rev State Rev State Rev State
State
0 New Document is Reserved Working
1 Sign Off Document Issued Current
2 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Current Working
3 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Current
4 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Superceded Current Working
5 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Superceded Current
See Document 240-58552870
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.17.2 Drawing Status Stamps
The use of drawing “status stamps” a watermark, rubber stamp, or cell may be used. Only the following
list of stamps shall be used:
Preliminary
Issued for contruction
As built
Controlled copy
Superseded
Cancelled
Controlled Copy
Issued to:
Date of Issue:
Check print
Cell B2: Submit a letter of compliance to all Scope of Work with no exclusions.
supply Tenderer, of Criteria,
as Evaluation 11 the listed of for mandatory scope366-552799 0 3 qualifying Evaluation serves Mandatory process both best The meet documents the the strategy Identifier: to Project
Contact Information
Source: Annexure L - Scope of Work and Technical Evaluation Criteria.zip (unknown){"name":null,"email":null,"phone":null,"department":"for all 6 units. The Dirty","address":null}
Evaluation Criteria
Source: Annexure L - Scope of Work and Technical Evaluation Criteria.zip (unknown)functionality like SPO “View and Mark-up” are used the same rules for mark/correction will apply.
produce design drawings of consistent and professional quality. The accuracy and adequacy of the
designer or drafter of the individual responsibility for producing quality drawings.
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
[12] 240-58552870 SmartPlant for Owner Operators (SPO) Document Metadata Standard
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure L - Scope of Work and Technical Evaluation Criteria.zip (unknown)Alternative Reference Number: N/A
Area of Applicability: Engineering
Documentation Type: Specification
Revision: 02
Total Pages: 9
Next Review Date: N/A
Disclosure Classification: CONTROLLED
Disclosure
Compiled by Functional Responsibility Authorised by
......................................... ......................................... .........................................
T. Malwandla Chris Odendaal Tumiso Railo
Mechanical Engineer Lead Discipline Engineer Project Engineering Manager
Kusile Civil & Structural Kusile Low Pressure Kusile Project
Engineering Services
10/03/2026 06/03/2026Date: .................................24.02.2026 Date: ................................. Date: .................................
Supported by
.........................................
Yuvir Gokul
Engineer Design Work Lead
Kusile Project
06/03/2026Date: .................................
Kusile De-grit Sump Submersible Pumps Technical Unique Identifier: 366-541798
Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Table of contents
1 introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
2 supporting clauses ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Scope ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Purpose ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Applicability ......................................................................................................................................... 3
Normative/informative references ................................................................................................... 3
Normative ............................................................................................................................................ 3
Informative .......................................................................................................................................... 3
Definitions ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Abbreviations............................................................................................................................................... 4
Roles and responsibilities ..................................................................................................................... 4
Process for monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 4
Related/supporting documents .......................................................................................................... 4
3 engineering and contractor’s design.................................................................................................. 5
Description of works/ works information .................................................................................... 5
General ............................................................................................................................................... 5
Scope of Supply .................................................................................................................................. 5
Performance and Design Requirements ............................................................................................. 5
Drawings and Data.............................................................................................................................. 6
Motor Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 6
Other Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 6
Test Requirements .............................................................................................................................. 6
4 authorisation ................................................................................................................................................... 6
5 revisions ............................................................................................................................................................. 7
6 development team .......................................................................................................................................... 7
Appendix a : employer’s documents for the works ............................................................................. 8
Appendix b – ESKOM standards and guidelines ....................................................................................... 9
List of tables
Table 1: Table of Definitions ......................................................................................................................................... 4
Table 2: Abbreviations .................................................................................................................................................. 4
Table 7. Employer’s Drawings ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
The de-grit system – dirty drains recovery consists of one sump per unit for all 6 units. The Dirty
Drains Recovery - de-gritting Sumps accumulate water containing fly ash and coarse ash particles
in sumps located around the plant site and transfer this water to the coal stockyard settling basin.
Each sump consists of two submersible pumps and units 4 to 6 had the same sized pump units.
During the startup of Unit 4 and 5 there were pump failures which resulted in unit 6 pumps being
used at these units. Two replacement pumps are therefore required for unit 6.
2 supporting clauses
Scope
The purpose of this document is to define the Works required on all stated structures and systems.
Applicability
This document is applicable to Kusile Power Station.
Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
Normative
[1]. ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
[2]. All work shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Occupational Health
and Safety Act (Act ) as amended.
[3]. SANS 1200 Series: Standardised Specification For Civil Engineering Construction
[4]. SANS 10142-1: The wiring of premises. Part 1: Low-voltage installations.
[5]. ESKASAAA3 Approval of Personnel Performing Quality Related Special Processes on all
Eskom Plant.
[6]. GGS 0462 Eskom Quality Requirement.
[7]. NWS 1058 Safety at Construction Sites.
[8]. OHSACT Occupational Health and Safety Act, .
[9]. PA/270/003 Safety Guide for Contractors.
[10]. PS/031/001 Scaffolding Erection, Use and Inspection Standard Process.
[11]. SABS ISO 9000 I-III SERIES Code of Practice for Quality Systems (as Amended).
[12]. OPR 3305 (rev 3) Eskom Plant Safety Regulations.
Informative
[13]. 32-727 Safety, Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ) Policy/Procedure
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Definitions
Table 1: Table of Definitions
Definition Description
Service provider contracted to provide a specific service to Eskom, Kusile
Contractor
Power Station.
Employer Eskom, or Eskom Kusile Power Station or representative
A registered Professional Engineer or a registered Professional Engineering
Engineer Technologist specialising in and having experience in the design of lifting
stations.
Abbreviations
Table 2: Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
CoC Certificate of Completion
KET Kusile Execution Team
OHSA Occupational health and Safety Act
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
QA Quality Assurance
QC Quality Control
QCP Quality Control Plan
QMS Quality Management System
SABS South African Bureau of Standards
SANS South African National Standards
SHE Safety Health and Environmental
SOW Scope of Work
Roles and responsibilities
Contractor to provide personnel with appropriate and suitable skills to perform the work.
The Contractor ensures Compliance with all requirements of the Occupational Health and
Safety Act no and its regulations so as to ensure the health and safety of persons
carrying out the Works.
Process for monitoring
Not applicable.
Related/supporting documents
As referenced herein and appendix A
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
3 engineering and contractor’s design
Description of works/ works information
The following sections contain the details of the Works required to be completed by the Contractor.
The work under these specifications shall include furnishing of two submersible sump pumps,
including driver and all other specified accessories.
General
The sump pumps shall be submersible unit supplied in accordance with section 3.1.3 and
Appendix A.
Scope of supply shall include the furnishing of two (2) submersible sump pumps including drivers.
Performance and Design Requirements
Performance and design requirements for the equipment to be furnished under this section of these
specifications are indicated herein.
The sump pumps shall be sized for the following conditions:
Pump Identification numbers/ KKS Tags 6 0GME11 AP001;
6 0gme12 ap001;
Rated capacity 169 m3/h
Rated total head, meters of water 44m
Maximum Shutoff Head, percent of rated 125%
head
Specific Gravity at rated conditions – light 1.0317
slurry (at 5 deg. C Water)
Specific gravity at worst case solids (30% 1.226
solids) (at 5 deg. C Water)
Maximum solids diameter 40mm
Min/Rated/Design Temperature, Deg. C 5/ 34/ 65
Power 70 kW
Maximum Rated Speed 1,500 rpm
Rated Voltage 400v
Frequency 50 Hz
Phases 3-Phase plus neutral.
Rated Current 132A
NEMA/IEC Enclosure IP 68
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Electrical Service See Standard 240-57617975
Factory performance Test Yes
Power supply cable length from existing 10.0 m
terminal box
Drawings and Data
Catalog cuts and manufacturer's specifications covering the sump pump and accessories shall be
Submitted to Engineer for approval.
Motor Assembly
The Contractor provides low voltage motors that are designed and purchased with the pumps and
associated pump cables, in accordance with Eskom Standard 240-57617975. All LV motors are
rated at 400V. The motors are provided for being submerged in the sump along with the pump.
Motors shall be arranged for vertical mounting integral with the driven equipment. Enclosure shall
be waterproof submersible type. External surfaces shall be coated with moisture corrosion-resistant
alkyd enamel or with polyester or epoxy paint or coating. Metal-to-metal fits shall be coated with
corrosion resistant compound. Shaft and hardware shall be of corrosion-resistant material. The shaft
shall be threaded for attaching the impeller. Rotors shall be dynamically balanced and coated with a
corrosion-resistant polyester paint.
Routine tests shall be performed on each motor at the manufacturer's factory to confirm that there
are no electrical or mechanical defects. The motor shall be able to operate above the water level
without overheating.
Other Accessories
Connections shall be provided at the top of the pumps for lifting. Each pump shall be supplied
with an agitator at the pump suction that connects to the impeller shaft.
Test Requirements
The manufacturer shall allow for a workshop performance test or at least a run test prior to the
release of the pump.
4 authorisation
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name & Surname Designation
Tumiso Railo Kusile Project Engineering Manager
Yuvir Gokul Kusile Engineering EDWL
Richie Sibiya Kusile Electrical Technologist
Chris Odendaal Kusile LPS LDE
Tiyani Malwandla Kusile Mechanical Engineer
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
5 revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
January 2025 0 T. Malwandla -
July 2025 1 T. Malwandla Pump quantity revision
February 2026 2 T. Malwandla Pump quantity revision
6 development team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
Tiyani Malwandla
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Appendix a: employer’s documents for the works
The latest revisions of the following listed drawings are included as Attachments and shall form part
of the Employer's Documents.
Table 3. Employer’s Drawings
Drawing No. Rev No. Title
366-27222 1 Unit 6 Sump Pump Performance Curve
366-27223 5 Unit 6 Degrit Sump Motor Data Sheet
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
Kusile Leakage Detection Sumps Water Recovery Unique Identifier: 366-259152
Technical Specification Revision: 02
Page:
Appendix b– ESKOM standards and guidelines
Code description
SANS 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
SANS 10142-1 The Wiring of Premises – Low Voltage Installations
240-56227443 Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Stations
SPF 200-4190 The Application of KKS Plant Coding Standard
240-128515850 Documentation Handover Specification.
240-86973501 Engineering Drawing Standards – Common Requirements
240-57617975 Low Voltage Motor Procurement Standard
240-106365693 Standard for the External Corrosion Protection of Plant
Equipment Associated Piping with Coating
OHSA Personnel protection
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the database.
This document contains information regarding the Requirements for Control and Power Cables for
Power Stations Standard.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This document has been prepared to assist those involved in the designing and installation of cables at
the power station. All cabling and associated work shall be designed and executed in accordance with
approved standards, codes of practice and the manufacturer’s recommendations
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to define the requirements with regard to the selection, design and
execution of cabling by the cabling Contractor and other contractors carrying out work at the power
station
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Limited Divisions.
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs. The latest revision and amendments of the following documents shall be read in conjunction
with this specification. However, in cases of conflict the provisions of this specification shall take
precedence
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ASTM E814 Fire Test of through Penetration Fire Stops
[2] ESKARAAG 4 Operating Regulations for High-Voltage Systems
[3] ESKSCAAB8 Specification for corrosion protection of mechanical items of plant
[4] GGR 0992 Plant Safety Regulations
[5] GGP 0184 Performance guidelines for fire barrier seals
[6] GGS 0183 Fire Barrier Seals for Cable Installations in Power Stations
[7] GGS 0224 Fire protection at coal fired power stations
[8] GGS 0386 Requirements for Power and Control Cables for Power Stations
[9] GGS 0445 Drawing numbering system.
[10] IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
[11] IEEE 634 Testing for Fire Rated Penetration Seals
[12] NRS 028 Cable Lugs and Ferrules for Cu and Al Conductors preferred requirements for the
application in the Electrical Supply Industry
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
[13] NWS 1220 Specification for Cable Junction and Reduction Boxes for Power Stations
[14] NWS 1527 Eskom Specification for the Installation of Cables and Cable Racks at Power Stations
[15] OHS Act no Electrical Installation Regulation under Occupational Health and Safety.
[16] H.V. TEST CC A handy guide to the safe over voltage pressure testing , and condition monitoring
of cable installations
[17] SANS 97 Impregnated-paper-insulated metal-sheathed cables for rated voltages from 3.3/3.3 kV
up to 19/33 kV
[18] SANS 791 Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) sewer and drain pipes and pipe fittings
[19] SANS 1091 National colour standards for paint.
[20] SANS 1213 Mechanical cable glands
[21] SANS 1339 Electric Cables–Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated cables for voltages from
3.8/6.6kV to 19/33kV.
[22] SANS 1411 Materials of insulated electrical cables and flexible cords, Parts 1 to 6
[23] SANS 1507 Electric cables with extruded solid dielectric insulation for fixed installations
[24] SANS 1520-2 Flexible electric trailing cable for use in mines. Part 2: High voltage (3.8/6.6kV to
19/33kV) cables.
2.2.2 Informative
[25] SANS 1574 Electric cables-flexible cords
[26] SANS 9000 to 9004 Quality management systems and standards.
[27] SANS 60269 Low-Voltage Fuses
[28] SANS 10142-1 The wiring for premises Part 1: low-voltage installations.
[29] SANS 10177-2 Fire testing of materials, components and elements used in buildings Part 2: Fire
resistance test for building elements.
[30] SANS 10198-1 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 1: Definitions and statutory requirements, South African Bureau of Standards,
Pretoria.
[31] SANS 10198-2 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 2: Choice of cable type and methods of installation, South African Bureau of
Standards, Pretoria.
[32] SANS 10198-3 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 3: Earthing systems - general provisions, South African Bureau of Standards,
Pretoria.
[33] SANS 10198-4 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 4: Current ratings, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[34] SANS 10198-5 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 5: Determination of thermal and electrical resistivity of soil, South African
Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[35] SANS 10198-6 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 6: Transportation and storage, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
[36] SANS 10198-7 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 7: Safety precautions, SABS of Standards, Pretoria.
[37] SANS 10198-8 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 8: Cable laying and installation, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[38] SANS 10198-9 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 9: Jointing and termination of extruded solid dielectric insulated cables up to
3,3 kV, South African Bureau of Standards, Pretoria.
[39] SANS 10198-12 The selection, handling and installation of electric power cables of rating not
exceeding 33kV Part 12: Installation of earthing system, South African Bureau of Standards,
Pretoria.0.00/10335 Power and control wiring terminations
[40] 0.00/1310 Standard Power and Control Cable Code
[41] 0.00/2713 Instrument Cable Code
[42] 0.54/393, C12 Earthing: Metal cladding
[43] 0.54/393, C16 Earthing: Tanks and bases
[44] 0.54/393, C19 Earthing: All single core cable sealing ends
[45] 0.54/393, C20 Earthing: Switchboards with thermoplastic insulated cables
[46] 0.54/393, C21 Earthing: Switchboards with paper insulated cables
[47] 0.54/393, C22 Earthing: Armoured multi-core control and power cables
[48] 0.54/393, C23 Earthing: Gland plate earthing details0.54/393, C26 Earthing: Bolted connection
between copper strap and copper rods
[49] 0.54/393, C22 Earthing of process control computers
[50] 0.54/393, C30 Earthing of electrical enclosures
[51] 0.54/393, P1 Earthing of oil type transformers in power stations
[52] 0.54/393, P2 Earthing: Motors fed by XLPE or thermoplastic cables
[53] 0.54/393, P3 Earthing: Motors fed by MICC, conduit or PILCSWA cables mounted on earthed
material
[54] 0.54/393, P4 Earthing: Motors fed by MICC, conduit or PILCSWA cables mounted on un¬earthed
material
[55] 0.54/393, P5 Earthing: Steel enclosures mounted on earthed material and connected with un-
earthed cables
[56] 0.54/393, P6 Earthing: Control equipment and local motor starters
[57] 0.54/393, P7 Earthing: Power station auxiliary bay signal earth terminal box
[58] 0.54/393, P9 Earthing of smaller 3-phase consumer without neutral with 4-core cable
[59] 0.54/393, C1, C2 & C3 Earth mat and details
[60] 0.66/3355 Cable route marker
[61] 0.66/3356 Typical section of cable trenches
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
Drives are all mechanical or electrical prime movers, e.g. actuators, fans,
Drives
pumps, etc
The power system from the generator terminals to the 400 kV bushings of
Export system the generator transformer and the unit transformer 11 kV bushings and
includes the busbars, circuit breakers, earth switches and transformers
The 22/420kV step up transformer that connects the generator to the
Generator transformer
transmission system
Maintenance is the function of restoring failed/worn components to a state
where it is capable of meeting its design intent and performance
Maintenance function
expectations, by repair or rework achieved through the application of
material and human resources in an efficient and cost effective manner
Major plant Machinery e.g. feed pumps, turbine, mill, air heater, etc
Station or Power Station Medupi Power Station
Boiler, turbine, generator, unit cooling water system, fabric filter plant and
Unit
including all auxiliary plant and systems associated with the unit
The 22/11.5 kV step down transformers that connects the export system to
Unit transformers
the unit boards
2.3.1 Classification
a. Controlled Disclosure: Controlled Disclosure to External Parties (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
Process control
P Open- (racks) and covered (trays). All control, instrumentation and
telephone cables below 60 V AC or DC
Low Voltage
L Power supply cables 24 V and 220 V DC, control cables 220 V DC and
230 V AC, power cables, 230 V, 400 V and 660 V AC
Low voltage trefoil
Power cables 400 and 660 V in trefoil (and neutral for 400 V)
S
configuration
Medium Voltage
M
Power Cables 6.6 and 11 kV three core
T Medium Voltage trefoil
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
2.5 Roles and responsibilities
None
2.6 Process for monitoring
None
2.7 Related/supporting documents
None
3. Compliance with standards
3.1 Compliance with standards
The installation of cables and cable racking shall be in strict accordance with the law, SABS codes of
practice and standards as well as the reference documents detailed under section 3.
3.1.1 Life expectancy:
The design, equipment selection and the installation of the cables and the associated equipment shall be
performed in such a way to have a 50 year life expectancy
3.1.2 Cable identification
3.1.2.1 Plant systems and cable schedules
a. Block diagrams and cable schedules for construction cables shall be prepared and maintained by
the Employer.
b. Cable block diagrams and system cable lists for all permanent installations shall be prepared by the
contractor responsible for providing the plant (in accordance with another specification). These
schedules shall then be issued to the cabling Contractor for the final design, routing, installation and
testing of the required cables.
c. The Employer shall also issue cable schedules (and block diagrams in selected areas) to the cabling
Contractor for areas of plant where the interface design of the installation is performed by the
Employer. The cabling Contractor shall perform the final design, routing, installation and testing of
these cables.
d. Separate cable schedules shall be issued for each distinct board, system etc.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.1.2.2 Cable identification code
Cable coding is the identification of cables according to the origin of the cable. The cable number format
shall be as follows:
Table 1: Cable Identification Code
Classifying Element Numbering Element
Process Related Code Cable Number
NNAAA i.e. 00ETK NNNN i.e. 8001
Or
Point of Installation Code Cable Number
NNAAA i.e. 00EYG NNNN i.e. 8001
3.1.3 Cable number tag details
All cables shall be labelled with standard UV resistant PVC K Type flexible cable markers on nine digit
carrier strips and attached on both ends with suitable cable ties (T18R or T30R depending on cable
thickness) as follows:
Figure 1: 10BBA1003
a. Cable number tags shall be fixed to the cables as follows:
One tag inside a floor mounted cubicle, switchboard etc. visible through open door.
One tag below the cubicle, switchboard etc. to permit identification of the cable from below the fire
barrier or other seal of the floor opening above which the board is mounted.
One tag at the cable entry into the field mounted equipment (for cubicles with top or side entry or
where a cable enters an enclosure from an open run only one tag just below the cable gland is
required).
b. Cable numbers for application in chemical corrosive environments or outside buildings e.g. coal and
ash conveying plant shall be stainless steel with engraved black letters and numbers and fixed with
stainless steel wire.
3.1.4 Standard cable codes
The cable types shall be designated in accordance with the codes detailed on the following drawings:
0.00/1310 Standard power and control cable code
0.00/2713 Instrument cable codeThe 31/2 core cables are designated with a Z instead of a 0 in the
otherwise numerical portion of the cable code, i.e. BVVZ4SCM.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2 Cable types and specification
3.2.1 General
a. The tables at the end of this document list the cables selected for use at the power station. This
listing has been compiled to optimise the number of different types of cable to be used at the power
station. No further types shall be introduced without prior consultation with the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall indicate basic information with regard to the compounds used in the cable
construction of each type of cable as per Schedule B.
3.2.2 Medium voltage power cables
3.2.2.1 Unarmoured 6.6 kV and 11 kV power cables (DXG and EXG cables)
a. In the power station buildings unarmoured Type B cables with copper conductors (class 2 in terms of
SANS 1411-1) shall be used. These cables shall be installed in protected runs on cable trays and do
not require armouring.
b. The cables shall be XLPE insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer
sheath (emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen). Acceptance criteria for insulation shall be in
accordance with SANS 1411-2.
c. Single and three core cables shall be with the cores individually screened with copper tape. Cables
shall be manufactured in accordance with SANS 1339 and SANS 1411 Parts 1, 2, 4 and 7.
3.2.3 Armoured 6.6 kV and 11 kV cables (DXE and EXE cables)
a. For outdoor installations where mechanical damage is possible, installation in concrete trenches or
direct burial in ground the cables shall be round steel wire armoured Type A (BVXnnCV) with copper
conductors (class 2 in terms of SANS 1411-1).
b. The cables shall be XLPE insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer
sheath and bedding (emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen). Acceptance criteria for insulation
shall be in accordance with SANS 1411-2.
c. Single and 3-core cables shall be with the cores individually screened with copper tape. These
cables shall be manufactured to SANS 1339 and SANS 1411 Parts 1, 2, 4, 6 and 7.
3.2.4 Single core 6.6 kV and 11 kV cables application
a. Single core cables shall only be used on major power distribution circuits where the current rating is
such that multi-core cables are not practical.
b. Where trefoil clamps are used for single core cables in trefoil configuration, these clamps must be
capable of withstanding the forces generated by short circuits as shown in paragraph 11.3.
c. All armoured single core cables in trefoil groups shall be earthed on one side only in order to prevent
armour circulating currents flowing through closed circuits. Single point earthing shall be carried out
on the feeding side of board to board feeders or on the normal side of supply in a ring feeder
section.
d. On feeds from a board via a transformer to another board (typical example: 11 kV board to
transformer to 6.6 kV board) the cable armouring shall be earthed in the boards only.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2.5 Voltage rating
For XLPE insulated cables no voltage over rating is required (the reticulation system is high resistance
earthed) and the rated cable voltages shall be as follows:
For the 6.6 kV system the rated cable voltage is 3.8/6.6 kV.
For the 11 kV system the rated cable voltage is 6.35/11 kVFor paper insulated cables over rating of
the voltage level is required and the rated cable voltages shall be as follows:
For the 6.6 kV system the rated cable voltage is 6.35/11 kV.
For the 11 kV system the rated cable voltage is 12.7/22 kV.
3.2.6 Low voltage power cables
3.2.6.1 Unarmoured low voltage power cables
a. The cables shall be PVC insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer sheath
(emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen).
b. This type of cable shall be applied for control cables (i.e. 220 V DC, and 230 V AC) and AC power
cables (i.e. 230 V, 400 V, 660 V).
c. Low voltage 600/1000 V cables shall be manufactured to SANS 1507 as amended and SANS 1411
parts 1 and 2.
3.2.6.2 Armoured low voltage power cables
a. The cables shall be PVC insulated with flame-retardant reduced halogen emission PVC outer sheath
and bedding (emit a mass of not more than 15% halogen).
b. This range of cables shall be round steel wire armoured for burial in ground and for installations
where mechanical stresses are expected and shall be used for control cables (DC: 220 V, AC: 230
V) and power cables (230 V, 400 V AC).
c. The cables shall be manufactured to SANS 1507 and SANS 1411 Parts 1, 2 and 6. 8.3.3
Unarmoured and armoured power cables application
d. In the cable size range of 35 mm2 to 185 mm2 31/2 core cables with a neutral core approximately
1/2 of the cross sectional area of the phase conductors shall be used.
e. Where unarmoured cables are used for the interconnection between lead acid batteries and
chargers, separate cables shall be used for both the positive and negative connections. Depending
on the current rating the use of parallel cores in a two, three or four core cable shall be acceptable
for such connections provided the installation of a 630 mm2 single core cable is not warranted. Red
and blue sleeving shall then be used on all parallel cores when terminating the positive and negative
cables respectively (insulation tape shall not be acceptable).
f. At the battery side the cables shall be terminated onto take-off plates away from the batteries and
busbar connections shall be provided for connecting from the take off plates to the battery terminals.
The take off plates shall be provided by Others.
g. Where Nickel Cadmium batteries are mounted separately from the charger cubicle the
interconnections shall be made by two (2) core cables or using two (2) parallel cores in a four (4)
core cable, depending on current rating and available cable sizes. Standard core insulation shall be
covered by red and blue sleeving, where necessary, to indicate positive and negative, pole
connections respectively.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2.6.3 Colour coding of low voltage cable cores and terminations
a. Normal colour coding of cable cores to SANS 1507 Table 1 shall be used for cables with:
2 cores: red – black.
3 cores: red - yellow – blue.
4 cores: red -yellow - blue – black (green/yellow).
7, 12, 19 and 37 cores: numbers 1 to 7, 12, 19 or 37 respectively.
b. For termination purposes it may become necessary to code cores by coloured sleeves:
AC phase colours: red - yellow - blue
Neutral: black
DC positive: red
DC negative: blue
DC battery midpoint: black
Earth: green/yellow (plain green sleeving is not permissible).
3.2.6.4 Use of fourth cable core as earth continuity conductor
a. For three wire circuits fed by four core cables up to 16 mm2 phase conductors shall be colour coded
red - white-blue as per the SABS specifications. The fourth, black conductor shall be fitted with a
neatly fitting green-yellow sleeve before any lug is crimped onto it to indicate its use as earth
conductor.
b. In switchboards all earth continuity conductors shall be terminated onto the earth bar provided by the
switchboard supplier with predrilled 7 mm holes. The Contractor shall provide the M6 bolt, spring
washers, washers and nuts for such terminations (also refer to clause 8.4).
3.2.7 Control, protection and instrumentation cables
3.2.7.1 Cable type BVXnnCM
a. Multi-core thermoplastic insulated cables shall be used for all current transformer and voltage
transformer, secondary circuits and protection, tripping and closing circuits. These cables shall have
a voltage rating of 600/1000 V and current ratings dependent on the cross sectional area (details are
given in tables 11 and 12).
b. The minimum conductor size used for generator protection current transformer circuits shall be 2.5
mm2. For other applications the minimum size used shall be 1.5 mm2. All voltage transformer
circuits shall be run in dedicated cables with a minimum conductor size of 2.5 mm2 in the HV yard
and inside the power station.
c. Note that current sensors may be used in the MV switchgear and these shall then be cabled with
braided screen type cables.
d. Armoured or unarmoured cables for certain sensitive applications shall be laid in a protected run
separated from the normal cable installation in order to increase mechanical protection and fire
survivability. In general armoured cables shall be laid where armouring is essential for physical
protection e.g. for burial in ground or in positions with an increased danger of mechanical damage
either during installation or in service. Properly earthed steel wire armouring also provides a degree
of protection against electromagnetic interference in areas with a high disturbance signal level.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
e. Cables shall have numbered cores except for 2, 3 or 4 core cables, which are colour coded. All
cores shall be ferruled with the lead numbers shown on the cabling drawings.
3.2.7.2 Cable type BVSnnCM
Multi-core thermoplastic insulated overall screened (not armoured) cables of the BVS series shall be
used for non-conventional control circuits where low impedance electronic circuitry is employed. This
cable type shall only be used when requested specifically by the Employer.
3.2.7.3 Cable type UVGnnACM
a. For all digital and analogue signals where low level signals apply, thermoplastic insulated overall
screened twisted pair UVG control cables shall be used except for cables in this category which run,
over long distances outside of buildings or are buried in ground. Conductor pairs in this series shall
be identified by a colour code system of orange, violet and turquoise rings.
b. The individual cores shall not be numbered or ferruled and shall be terminated in sequence as set
out by the Engineer.
c. Type UVG cables shall have a voltage rating of 300/500 V with a rated conductor area of 0.5 mm2
and a signal level of 1 A shall not be exceeded.
d. Screens and drain wires shall be terminated at both ends in accordance with instructions provided by
the respective supplier. In some cases, screens are earthed at one end only, usually the point of
cable source e.g. cables to temperature or vibration sensors of a motor with insulated bearing
pedestals.
3.2.8 Mineral Insulated cables
a. Mineral insulated cables shall only be used in exceptional circumstances where route temperatures
are high. They shall not used where vibration could result in failure due to metal fatigue. Where
mineralinsulated cable is used for motor supplies, it shall be terminated in a junction box near the
motor and the final connection made with special cable suitable for the high ambient temperature i.e.
silicon insulated cable or equivalent.
3.2.9 Flexible connections
Where electrical equipment is mounted on the boiler face which is subject to vertical movement due to
heat expansion the connection between the equipment and the static steelwork shall be made by means
of high temperature flexible cables in a flexible conduit. This cabling shall be supplied and installed by
the Contractor.
3.2.10 Marking and information on cable sheaths
a. All cable sheaths shall be black with colour coding traces or printing as follows:
Table 2: Marking and information on cable sheaths
Cable trace colour identifying cable as having
Red Flame retardant PVC sheath only (LOI >27%)
Orange Flame retardant PVC bedding and sheath
Blue Low halogen emission PVC bedding and sheath (See note 1)
White Halogen free cable
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.2.10.1 Notes:
a. The emission of HCL gases in a fire situation is reduced from approximately 30% of the weight for
standard PVC to below 15%.
b. This industry coding shall be given preference above that of the Employer’s code. The trace colour
codes shall be indicated in Schedule B for the respective cable manufacturers to be used as
suppliers.
c. If the cable is identified by a colour coding trace extruded into the sheath which in the manufacturer’s
opinion weakens the sheath and if the cable manufacturer cannot guarantee the mechanical
properties of such sheathing under all conditions e.g. abuse during installation and UV radiation over
extended periods, the Employer will desist from requesting such coding traces. It is then preferred to
have the required information embossed into or invariably printed in colour code onto the cable
sheath in the process of extruding the sheath onto the cable. This information includes:
voltage level,
name or trade-mark of cable manufacturer and
SABS specification to which the cable is manufactured, even if some portions of the cable make-up
deviate from the specification such as SANS 1507.
d. Cable manufacturers may find it convenient to divide or duplicate this information by means of two
embossings or printing rollers on opposite sides of the cables up to 15 mm diameter. For cables
above 15 mm diameter two (or more) lines shall be required. The height of the characters shall not
be less than 15% of the cable overall diameter.
e. The Contractor shall indicate in writing which cable sheath compounds are provided for and which
method of marking and information (colour traces or coloured printing) shall be used.
3.2.11 Dimensions of cables
Tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 indicate the nominal overall diameter of the cables to be selected for the power
station. Reference is made to Schedule B of the Contract for guaranteed dimensions, where these are
required.
3.2.12 Special cables
Special cable types which may be required for thermocouple leads, high temperature/high flexibility
applications, or heavy current high frequency applications such as turbo generator excitation circuits are
not covered by this standard. The supply and installation of such cables shall be the responsibility of the
supplier of the associated Plant.
3.3 Layout, racking and laying
3.3.1 Drawings
a. The Employer shall provide drawings showing cable servitudes and the cable layout along the
servitudes.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
b. The cabling contractor shall provide a cable racking system vertically, horizontally and horizontally in
a vertical plane as called for in the specification and in the drawings issued by the Employer. Details
of the racking system and/or supplementary steelwork shall be submitted to the Engineer for
acceptance before installation. Where necessary the Employer shall obtain approval from Others
responsible for major structures to which racking should be fitted.
3.3.2 Cable racks
a. Cable racks shall be provided such that every cable is adequately supported throughout its run.
Racking for power cables and control cables shall be designed to support the cables at least every
375 mm. Control cables may have to run on cable trays or in ducting so that they are supported over
their entire length.
b. The minimum spacing between open telephone, control and instrumentation cable racks and power
cable racks shall be 1000 mm. This may be reduced at crossings, which is at right angles. Where
limited space makes it necessary to bring power and control cable racking closer than 1000 mm,
control cable trays shall be installed and closed by means of a suitable cover to create a Faraday
cage around the control cables.
c. Separate racks or trays shall be installed for cables of the following voltage levels:
d. Power cables 6.6 kV and 11 kV in trefoil configuration
e. Cables in trefoil configuration shall be clamped with non-magnetic clamps capable of withstanding
forces generated by short circuit currents in accordance with paragraph 11.3. The normal centre line
distance between clamps shall be 750 mm but clamps shall be fixed to the racking only every 3000
mm.
f. For field mounted runs, in particular for small power and control cabling, cable trays manufactured
from high tension wire mesh shall be acceptable. These trays are less prone to collection of dust.
3.3.3 Reduction of fire hazards along racking routes
a. Where practical, cable racks shall be routed away from fire exposure or hazards or shall be
protected from such exposures. Where cable racks are subject to oil spills, they shall be designed to
prevent the spread of oil spill fires (see paragraph 9.9, Sun and dust shields).
b. Under-floor and concealed cable spreading areas which have a height of more that 800 mm and
total floor area exceeding 300 m2 shall allow for the provision with a fire detection system (by
Others). Refer also to the standard GGS 0224, Fire Protection at Coal Fired Power Stations.
3.3.4 Loading of cable trays and ladder racks
a. The laying of cable onto racks shall conform to the following requirements:
Two MV or LV trefoil groups per 450 mm wide rack.
Three MV or LV trefoil groups per 600 mm wide rack*Three LV trefoil groups plus two neutral cables per 60
All three core MV and multi-core LV cables above 16 mm2 rated area are laid in a single layer per
rack only.
LV cables up to 6 mm2 rated area are laid in a double layer on crowded rack routes, otherwise also
only in single layers.
Stacking of control and telephone cables up to the top edge of the side member is permissible.
b. The following worst case loads for horizontal cable racks in kg per linear metre of racking shall apply:
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
Table 3: Loading of Cable Trays and Ladder Racks (A)
Loading of horizontal racks
Rack width [mm]
Parameter
150 300 450 600 800 1000
Dead weight cable load 30 kg 60 kg 90 kg 120 kg 150 kg 190 kg
Safety factor 1.6 for 50 kg 100 kg 150 kg 200 kg 240 kg 305 kg
dead weight
Live weight (2) 115 kg 145 kg 175 kg 205 kg 235 kg 275 kg
Safety factor 1.2 for live 140 kg 175 kg 210 kg 245 kg 280 kg 330 kg
weight
Resultant design load 150 kg 180 kg 220 kg 250 kg 300 kg 350 kg
Notes:
1000 mm wide rack is used generally for cable risers only. In individually approved and exceptional
cases only, it may be used for horizontal runs.
c. The distance of support columns shall be selected in such a way that a horizontally installed rack
shall be deflected not more than 1:150 at the midpoint between two supports when subjected to the
design load shown above i.e. 5 mm at the midpoint between supports 1500 mm apart.
d. Where support columns carry more than one rack or tray the centre line distance shall be selected
according to the design load of the rack carrying the greatest design load.
e. A cantilever arm may not deflect more that 1:150 at the front when supporting a rack with a load
equal to the design load shown above evenly distributed over its width i.e. 5 mm approximately for a
cantilever arm carrying a 800 mm wide rack.
f. The following worst case loads for perforated cable trays in kg per linear metre of tray shall apply:
Table 4: Loading of Cable Trays and Ladder Racks (B)
Loading of perforated cable trays
Rack width [mm]
Parameter
150 300 450 600 800
Dead weight cable load 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg 120 kg 150 kg
Safety factor 2,5 for dead 150 kg 200 kg 250 kg 300 kg 375 kg
weight
Design load (1) and (2) 60 kg 80 kg 100 kg 120 kg 150 kg
g. Note that for (1) both cable trays and weldmesh racks shall not normally be expected to carry live
weight of persons climbing on to the trays for installation or maintenance purposes (must be
positioned so as to avoid ready “step functions”) and (2) the weights indicated above are based on a
centreline distances of supports of 1500 mm.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.3.5 Separation of power and control cables at outside plant buildings and substations
In order to minimise problems inside and outside buildings with routing and laying of cables and also
noise interference in control cables, separate power and control cable entry into buildings shall be used.
Where possible two or more separate cable entry openings shall be provided or made use of. This will
also facilitate early separate closing of openings when cable laying is completed (in stages).
3.3.6 Use of racking by Others
The Employer shall advise the Contractor on racking requirements of Others. The Contractor shall install
racking for such purposes at the rate prices of the contract. The Engineer shall advise the Contractor
with regard to exact requirements as well as the required completion dates for the racking.
3.3.7 Supporting of cables on racks
a. Armoured and unarmoured multi-core cables shall be supported every 375 mm in the horizontal
position where racks are provided. Where cables leave the racks or descend or ascend vertically,
they shall be clamped every 750 mm at clipping points to be provided by the Contractor.
b. Single core cables shall be clamped by clipping points at intervals not exceeding 750 mm in the
horizontal position but, although fixing holes are provided in the supporting steelwork at each
clipping point, they shall be fixed to the supports every 3000 mm only. Alternative fixing points shall
be offset against each other by about 100 mm along the racking route in order to create a basic
snake formation along which the cable can expand and contract on heat cycling. Single core cables
shall be clamped by clipping points at intervals not exceeding 750 mm in the vertical position.
3.3.8 Clipping points
Clipping points are defined as all points at which cables are secured to racking, trays, walls or ceilings by
means of cleats, straps or saddles, made of nylon, stainless steel or another approved material.
3.3.8.1 General
a. On cable risers cables shall be fixed to cable ladders or inside trays at 750 mm intervals.
b. On vertical cable runs in (galvanised) conduit adequate space between separate conduit lengths
shall be left to allow strapping of the cable to a support structure to take up the weight of the cable
for each conduit length.
c. On horizontal racks installed in a vertical plane cables shall be strapped every 375 mm to ensure a
neat appearance.
3.3.8.2 Single core cables
a. Clipping points for trefoil groups of/or single core cables comprise a non magnetic portion or is of
non magnetic material to prevent the creation of eddy currents in the clamp. Hardwood shall not be
acceptable. Clamps shall be the correct size for the cables.
b. Clamps shall be capable of withstanding the forces generated by the through fault current specified
in clause 11.3 when installed in accordance with this specification.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.3.8.3 Multi-core cables
a. Clipping points for multi-core cables shall be applied at positions in accordance with clause 9.7 and
include the supply of materials, drilling of concrete and steelwork, painting if required, and the
installation of the cleats.
b. For indoor and outdoor installations protected from direct sun radiation nylon strapping shall be used
for all cables up to 30 mm diameter.
c. Stainless steel strapping shall be used for cables above 30 mm diameter for indoor installation. For
all cables installed outdoors only stainless steel strapping shall be acceptable. Stainless steel
strapping shall be strapped over a plastic bedding strip to prevent damage to the cable sheath.
Alternatively coated stainless steel strapping shall be used.
d. Approved galvanised “K-clamps” with rubber or plastic inserts to protect the cable shall be used for
terminating unarmoured cables in floor mounted indoor switchboards. The switchboard manufacturer
shall provide suitable C-profile rails.
e. All clipping and strapping material (and methods) shall be approved by the Engineer before
installation is undertaken.
3.3.8.4 Control cables
Where a large number of control cables are accommodated in a limited space, they may be bunched
and fixed to racking or trays by means of an approved strap. Not more than 12 cables shall be
accommodated under one strap.
3.3.9 Sun and dust shields
a. Where cabling is subject to direct sun radiation, oil spills or severe dust accumulation, shields shall
be provided. The shields shall be designed to protect the cables against sunlight or against oil, dust
and other foreign matter, as required for the particular case and does not obstruct air flow past the
cables or diminish the thermal rating of the cables in any way.
b. Sun shields shall be designed to protect cable racks against direct sun radiation at angles not less
than 35o from the vertical plane and if slotted for ventilation, gives not less than 75% coverage.
3.3.10 Sleeve pipes for cables
Sleeve pipes shall be provided to carry cables under roadways, foundations, aprons and certain floors.
Details of all permissible types of cable pipes are provided in Table 7.
3.3.11 Cable chases
Cables shall only be buried in chases in concrete floors or walls where no alternative arrangements are
possible. Floor chases shall be filled with sand and screeded over. This arrangement is avoided in areas
where oil spillage is possible.
3.3.12 Cable laying in ground
a. The details of the depth of laying and spacing of all types of cable used is as shown in Table 9. The
dimensions stated are the minimum permissible and shall not be reduced without investigating
current loadings in detail (refer also to drawing number 0.66/3356). Where cables are laid in ground,
such runs shall be shown in detail on appropriate drawings for reference purposes and protected by
concrete slabs or yellow plastic cover plates and marker tapes.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
b. Every effort shall be made to run cables either in tunnels, trenches or sleeve pipes, should they have
to be laid below ground level.
3.3.13 Cable route markers
Concrete cable route markers as per drawing 0.66/3355 shall be provided to mark all cable servitudes
and the general location of buried cables. The route markers shall be located at 50 m intervals and
wherever a route changes direction, to mark buried joints and where cables cross roads, railways or any
other servitudes.
3.3.14 Cable laying in air from great heights
a. In the boiler house area it is usual practice to lay cables from drums transported to the highest floor
level required. Extreme care shall be taken when lowering cable for laying from a drum to ensure
that the cable weight is countered by a suitable braking means (e.g. weight of 100 m, 4 x 70 mm2
armoured cable is 510 kg). Assuming the total unarmoured cable weight is taken up by the
conductors only, the weight of 100 m is about 10% of the ultimate tensile strength only. This method
shall be acceptable, provided that clipping is performed promptly.
b. Attempts shall be made to limit the pulling force required to a minimum to avoid stretching the outer
layers of the cable. The cable manufacturer's maximum allowable mechanical forces on cables
during installation shall not be exceeded.
3.4 Termination of cables and cores
3.4.1 Termination through gland plates
a. Where cables enter enclosures through gland plates, mechanical cable glands of the armour or
cable gripping type to SANS 1213 shall be used. Glands shall be of the correct size for the cable.
Weatherproof shrouds shall be required only for exposed positions indoors and for all field mounted
terminations.
b. The quality of cable gland terminations shall be in line with and may not be lower than the degree of
protection (IP rating) of the enclosure against ingress of dust and water.
c. For MV cables where cable glands are required, split gland plates shall be provided to enable
removal of the cable without removal of the gland plate.
d. For single core cable terminations the gland plate and both gland and lock nut shall be of non-
magnetic material.
e. Cables shall be installed from the back to the front on the gland plate to enable cables to be added
without difficulty at a later stage, if required. Low voltage and control cables shall be grouped
separately on the gland plate.
f. Outdoor cables shall not enter at the top of a distribution board and where cables enter on the side,
care shall be taken to prevent water ingress.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.4.2 Termination of cables in switchboards
a. Where cables (larger than 70 mm2) enter switchboards or other cubicles through floor openings,
which will later be closed by adequately fire rated material to make them also vermin proof, gland
plates shall not be considered as essential. In that case the switchboard manufacturer is held
responsible for providing unistrut or similar rails to which cables can be securely clamped by the
cable contractor by means of “K-clamps” or approved equivalent. Non magnetic clamps shall be
used for single core cables.
b. Where space within the switchboard is limited, the unistrut shall be installed below the floor level and
the cables shall be fixed to this unistrut with K-clamps.
3.4.3 Cable entry into enclosures with non-standard threads
Certain imported equipment is supplied by Others with enclosures having cable entries with other than
metric threads. To permit fitting of cable glands to SANS 1213 the Contractor shall supply and fit the
correct reducers from one type and size of thread to the other.
3.4.4 MV Terminations and earthing of single core cables
a. Approved termination kits for terminating MV cables shall be supplied. Care shall be taken to ensure
that the dimensions and procedures issued with the kit are adhered to.
b. Single core cables connecting between boards shall be single-point-earthed on the feeder side.
Cables connecting transformers to boards are single point earthed at the switchboard. Trefoil earth
tails shall be bonded together with the shortest possible earth strap to the earth bar.
c. Cable earth tails shall be long enough to connect directly to the earth bar without jointing.
3.4.5 LV Power cable terminations
Cables of larger rated areas terminated straight onto the terminals of the lowest drive compartment in a
MCC may give problems due to heat expansion. An S-bend or a complete loop shall be provided near
the termination so that expansion due to temperature changes does not stress the cable or terminal.
3.4.6 Battery terminations
Cables shall not be terminated directly onto terminals of larger batteries. All such battery connections
shall be terminated on approved wall-mounted battery termination stand-off plates. These copper plates
shall be mounted on stand-off insulators designed to take the weight and strains of the cable
terminations. The interconnection from the wall-mounted stand-off plate to the battery terminal shall be
made by means of solid copper bars.
3.4.7 Multi-core thermoplastic insulated cable terminations
Terminations shall as a minimum requirement comply with the drawing 0.00/10335. Spare cores (those
not connected to any terminal) shall be left long enough to reach the furthest terminal and is neatly
fastened, ferruled with the cable numbers and earthed on one side only, usually the outgoing side of the
cable. Lug/terminal combinations different from those shown on the standard drawing shall not be not
used without approval.
3.4.8 Mineral-insulated cable terminations
Cable terminations for mineral-insulated cables shall be made with a cold-seal compound and all cores
shall be insulated throughout their length with continuous neoprene or nylon sleeving. Terminations
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
having jointed or PVC sleeving shall not be acceptable. The termination shall be suitable for operation up
to 80oC.
3.4.9 Process control cable terminations
a. Control and instrument cable terminations shall comply with the drawing 0.00/10335.
b. The termination of control cables onto delicate control equipment shall be performed in accordance
with the special instructions from the respective process control equipment supplier.
c. Process control cable shall generally be terminated by using screw clamp type connections at the
field equipment end. Pre-insulated lugs shall be crimped onto stranded cores for screw clamp type
terminations, e.g. on line-up terminals.
d. Termination of cables onto line-up terminal strips
e. Wire trunking for internal wiring and for the safe routing of incoming cable cores to the terminal strips
shall be used in switchboards and large distribution boards. When trunking is not available or
economical, control (and smaller power) cabling shall be harnessed and secured in a neat manner.
f. Identification of cores by means of approved ferrules sized to suit the core diameter shall be
provided.
3.4.10 Earthing of equipment and cables
For detailed instructions on the earthing methods when terminating cables, screens etc, refer to the
standard, 36-131/132, “Earthing and lightning protection” as well as the earthing standards, 0.54/393.
3.4.11 Panel jumper wires
With certain items of equipment it may be necessary to interconnect terminals in the same, adjacent or
nearby panels using jumper wires of rated area up to 4 mm2. The necessary jumper wires complete with
ferrules and suitable lugs or terminating pins where necessary shall be supplied and installed. Lugs and
terminating pins and the crimping tool used to fix them to the wire shall be reviewed and approved by the
Engineer.
3.4.12 Cable lugs and crimping tools
a. The size of cable lugs shall be selected to fit the bare copper conductors on which they are used.
For conductors 0.5 to 6 mm2 pre-insulated crimping lugs as per drawing 0.00/10335 shall be used.
All small lugs shall be crimped by means of the correct crimping tools. Crimping tools shall either be
of the manual or hydraulic type. Only standard pre-fabricated crimp lugs shall be used. Cutting, re-
drilling and other site modifications shall not be allowed. Pre-insulated crimp lugs with unbrazed
barrels shall not be crimped sideways.
b. Larger cable lugs shall be to the SABS specification and drawing 0.54/5609, i.e. the material body of
lugs shall not be less than the rated area of the conductor. For carrying out compressed joints or
terminations on cables above 16 mm2 rated area a suitable hydraulic compression unit complete
with the necessary dies, compression head, hose and pump shall be used. Crimping dies shall
produce a hexagon shaped crimp. Crimps with a deep central indent in the lug shall not be
acceptable. The hydraulic pump unit and compression head must feature an interlocked valve
system which can only be released when the compression operation has been fully executed.
c. For high fault current applications above 40kA heavy duty lugs with double crimps shall be used.
d. Cable cutters shall be used to strip flexible stranded cable, not a hack saw as this creates distortion
in the cable.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.4.13 Supply of bolts and nuts
a. In many cases the equipment supplier shall provide only termination points without any other
hardware. In that case, the Contractor shall supply correctly dimensioned bolts, washers (contact,
flat and spring washers as required) and nuts.
b. Material for outdoor installations shall be hot-dip or electro galvanised. Material for indoor
terminations shall be cadmium plated and passivated.
3.4.14 Connection torque
a. Torque wrenches shall be used to tighten screw-joints of copper bars as well as bolting cable lugs
onto copper bars, battery terminating plates and motor terminals to consistent and repeatable
values.
b. High tensile bolts of tensile strength 8.8 (class 8G) and nuts of strength 5.5 (class 5D) shall be used.
Bolts with tensile strength 5.5 (class 5D) shall not be accepted. The Contractor supplies all bolts,
nuts, flat and spring or contact washers for terminating power cables onto boards and other
equipment, e.g. transformers.
c. The specified material shall be used for the types of connections as shown in the following table:
Table 5: Connection torque (A)
Materials and bolt sizes for different types of joints
Joint material bolt sizes
Copper bar joints hex bolt, 2 contact washers, nut M5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16
Cable lugs onto copper bar bolt, washer, contact washers, Cheese head: M4, 5, 6 Hex bolts:
nut M5, 6, 8, 10, 12
Copper bar, large transformer bolt, washer, contact washer M16, 20, 24, 30, 36
bushings
Two cable lugs front and back bolt, spring washer, washer- Cheese head: M4, 5, 6 Hex bolt:
onto copper bar washer, spring washer, nut 6, 8, 10
d. The torque values for the different bolt sizes are given in the following table:
Table 6: Connection torque (B)
Torque values
Thread Size 8.8 High tensile bolt Testing [Nm] 4.6 Brass/copper/copper alloy Testing [Nm]
Original tightening [Nm] bolts
Original tightening [Nm]
M4 1.8 1.5 - -
M5 5.0 4.3 2.5 2.12
M6 8.0 6.8 4.0 3.4
M8 20 17 8.0 6.8
M10 40 35 13.0 11
M12 70 60 20 17
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
M16 155 130 40 34
M20 480 410 - -
M24 835 710 - -
M30 1660 1410 - -
M36 2900 2460 - -
e. The above values shall be reached to within ± 10% tolerance and be witnessed during erection in
accordance with the quality check sheet.
f. For motor terminations with bolts and nuts of a lower tensile strength (4.6 and 4 respectively) of
brass and or copper/copper alloys lower torque values shall be used.
3.4.15 Cable lengths and through joints
3.4.15.1 Lengths and through joints
a. Full drum lengths of cable shall be used wherever possible. One through joint shall be accepted as
routine per standard drum length of cable or part thereof, measured along the approved route
between terminations. All other cases are treated as exceptions and approval is required before
through joints may be installed.
b. Through joints in protection cables and secondary CT or VT leads shall not be acceptable. No
through joints are permissible under any circumstances with screened instrumentation cables.
c. Where an LV cable run exceeds the maximum drum length, soldered resin encapsulated joints shall
be required.
3.4.15.2 Junction and reduction boxes
a. On long low voltage cable runs the volt drop consideration may require the use of cables with rated
areas one or more sizes above that which would normally suffice for given motor currents. It may
then become necessary to install cable junction boxes near the consumer and to install a short
length of cable with the smaller rated area to suit the termination box size of the motor. Such junction
(reduction) boxes shall be supplied in accordance with drawing 0.66/55342 for sizes of the larger
cable 50 to 185 mm2. The junction boxes shall be rated for the applicable fault current and have the
same ingress protection rating of the electrical equipment to which the cable is connected.
b. For cable sizes 35 mm2 and below standard Pratley or CCG through boxes of size three or smaller
(depending on cable size) fitted with three or four DIN or C rail mounted line up terminals shall be
installed. Details of the application area, size and type of box and the final connection between the
box and the electrical equipment shall be provided.
3.5 Cable ratings
3.5.1 General
a. The current ratings shall be based on the requirements of SANS 10198-4 and the recommendations
from the cable manufacturers for unarmoured cable with halogen-free, low smoke and fume, fire
retardant insulating compounds.
b. For armoured cables with PVC insulation and bedding, steel wire armour and fire retardant PVC
sheath separate tables contain the information for the respective current ratings.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
c. De-rating for bunching etc. to the conditions stated in Tables 10, 10a, 11, 11a, 12, 12a, 13 and 13a
are similarly based on factors given by SANS 10198-4 and the industry.
d. The mineral insulated cable ratings have been calculated from BICC Publication 592 adapting the
values given therein to the conditions in Table 4.
e. The Contractor shall submit these tables for the specific cables to be provided and submit this to the
Engineer for acceptance one month after contract award.
3.5.2 Overload protection of cables
a. Cables with thermoplastic insulation may sustain serious damage when subjected, even for short
periods, to temperatures in excess of those permissible for continuous operation. The maximum fuse
ratings as per Table 17 for unarmoured and Table 17A for armoured cables shall apply.
b. The full current rating for thermoplastic insulated cables corresponds for most compounds to the
continuous operating temperature of the conductors of 70oC. Accordingly, such cables may only be
operated at full rating as given in the tables if suitably protected against excess currents arising from
abnormal conditions. If the duration of such excess currents does not exceed four hours, protection
is considered to be adequate if the minimum current at which it is designed to operated does not
exceed 1.5 times the tabulated ratings where cables are laid in air or in ducts, and not more than 1.3
times the tabulated ratings where the cables are laid directly in the ground.
c. Where the circuit protection is such that operation of a cable at full rating is not permissible under the
foregoing provisions, the cable required for a given continuous load current shall be selected to have
a rating as given in the tables, which is not less than:
the given continuous load current,
for cables in air or ducts, 0.67 of the minimum current at which the excess current protection is
designed to operate, or
for cables laid directly in the ground, 0.77 of the minimum current at which excess protection is
designed to operate.
d. Most cables with thermoplastic insulation are fuse protected. The fusing factors (defined as the ratio
of rated minimum fusing current to the continuous current rating of the fuse) for fuses to SANS
60269, Low-Voltage Fuses, are as follows:
Table 7: Low-Voltage Fuses
Class of fuse to SANS 60269 fusing factor
P 1.00 - 1.25
Q1 1.25 - 1.5
e. Therefore for cables in air, the tabulated current ratings shall be used if the circuit is protected by a
Class Q1 fuse of continuous rating not exceeding that of the cable.
f. The following is a calculation as an example for unarmoured cable, Table 17. The installation details
are as follows:
Continuous load - 190 A, 3 phase 400 V.
Route - Buried in ground, one cable without others in parallel.
Fuse - 250 A, Class Q1.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
g. The minimum cable for the continuous load current as per Table 13 is 70 mm2 (rating of 236 A). The
fusing current as per the above table is 250 x 1.5 = 375 A. The minimum current rating of the cable,
protected against overloads is 375 x 0.77 = 290 A. It will therefore be necessary to use a 120 mm2
cable with a continuous rating of 322 A.
3.5.3 Fault current ratings
a. The fault current ratings for the different voltage levels used in the auxiliary power system are as
follows:
Table 8: Fault Current ratings
System fault current ratings
Voltage level Fault current
11 kV (specific boards) 40 kA
11 kV (general) 31.5 kA
6.6 kV 25 kA
400 V 50 kA
660 V 50 kA
220 V dc 10 kA
24 V dc 25 kA
b. The rated cross sectional areas for cables under the direct control of circuit breakers shall be chosen
to withstand a three-phase or DC through fault without damage for the total operating time of the
protection and circuit breaker. Where the circuit breaker is fitted with instantaneous over current
protection, the cable is suitable for carrying full load (continuously) or short circuit current for 0.2
seconds, whichever requires the larger cable. Note that in some applications i.e. loop supply cables
the short circuit current time requirement may be above 0.2 seconds up to 1 second. The Contractor
shall clarify this with the Engineer before the cable is designed.
c. Cables protected by fuses shall be fault protected if selected to carry full load current continuously
(see Tables 17 and 17A).
d. Table 16 details the heat balance formula used in calculating fault ratings, together with the
calculated fault ratings for selected total fault times. The information contained in this table has been
calculated in accordance with SANS 1507. The nominal core area has been used in the calculations.
e. The Contractor shall provide data specific to the cables used. 11.4 Voltage regulation
3.5.3.1 Regulation for different applications
a. The different voltage drops that are tolerated depend on the type of consumer that is supplied and
are as follows:
1.5% - For critical drives like standby jacking oil pumps or turbine barring gear, though operating
during start up and shut down only.
3% - For all drives, and other consumers operating continuously under normal operating conditions
of the station or a unit. This is applicable also for redundancy applications i.e. one out of two situation
as for belt drives and for the coal mills which is a four out of five mills requirement at unit MCR.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
5% - For all drives and other consumers operating intermittently only under normal operating
conditions of the station or a unit. This can include drives like actuators, valve drives, shuttle heads,
soot blowers and precipitator rapper motors.
5% - For all drives operating continuously for a number of hours but during start up and shut down of
a unit only and for motor heaters used only at standstill.
5% - For all DC operated solenoid circuits with the full continuous solenoid operating current flowing.
b. With regard to the above limits, discretion is used in marginal cases when selecting cables because
of voltage drops, in particular with larger rated areas.
3.5.3.2 Voltage drop curves
a. The Contractor shall compile the voltage drop curves and the associated design criteria that shall be
used for the sizing of cables. This shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance after the
Contract has been awarded. The following curves (as a minimum) shall be compiled in an Excel
spread sheet and the curves plotted:
Table 9: Voltage Drop Curves
Curves for unarmoured lv-cables laid in air:
Sheet 1 - 1,5% 24 v dc
Sheet 2 - 3%
Sheet 3 - 5%
Sheet 4 - 1,5% 220 v dc
Sheet 5 - 3%
Sheet 6 - 5%
Sheet 7 - 1,5% 230 v ac
Sheet 8 - 3%
Sheet 9 - 5%
Sheet 10 - 1,5% 400 v ac
Sheet 11 - 3%
Sheet 12 - 5%
Sheet 13 - 1,5% 660 v ac
Sheet 14 - 3%
Curves for unarmoured hv-cables laid in air:
SHEET 15 - 1,5% 6,6 kV
SHEET 16 - 1,5% 11 kV
Curves for armoured lv-cables laid in air:
Sheet 17 - 1,5% 24 v dc
Sheet 18 - 3%
Sheet 19 - 5%
Sheet 20 - 1,5% 220 v dc
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
Sheet 21 - 3%
Sheet 22 - 5%
Sheet 23 - 1,5% 230 v ac
Sheet 24 - 3%
Sheet 25 - 5%
Sheet 26 - 1,5% 400 v ac
Sheet 27 - 3%
Sheet 28 - 5%
Curves for armoured mv-cables laid in air:
SHEET 30 - 1,5% 6,6 kV
SHEET 31 - 1,5% 11 kV
Curves for armoured lv-cables in ground:
Sheet 32 - 1,5% 230 v ac
Sheet 33 - 3%
Sheet 34 - 5%
Sheet 35 - 1,5% 400 v ac
Sheet 36 - 3%
Sheet 37 - 5%
Curves for armoured mv-cables in ground:
SHEET 38 - 1,5% 6,6 kV
SHEET 39 - 1,5% 11 kV
b. The following cable design criteria shall be provided by the Contractor and agreed with the Engineer:
The horizontal portion of the curves is determined by current carrying limitations only, assuming
cables are in a single layer.
The current derating according to derating Tables 10 to 14 must be considered besides the volt drop
for all bunched cables, otherwise the maximum permissible operating temperature of cables may be
exceeded as a result of restricted heat-loss dissipation. This shall be indicated on the curves.
The curve portions that mean that the current is limited by volt drop considerations only shall be
indicated on the curves.
For a cable or trefoil group laid in sleeve pipes up to 15 m length current carrying capacity of that
cable laid in air or ground, i.e. immediately before or after the sleeved section shall be used in
determining current limits.
For a cable or trefoil group laid in sleeve pipes longer than 15 m the current limit as per derating
Tables 10 to 14 must be updated with the specific cable specification and applied.
For cables laid in trenches in the HV Yard continuous current limits for cables laid in air (at 30°C)
must be reduced by 15% as air temperatures in these shallow trenches can reach approximately
40°C.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Requirements for Control and Power Cables for Power Unique Identifier: 240-56227443
Stations Standard Revision: 1
Page:
3.6 Intermediate cable storage at site
a. The Contractor shall utilize the allocated site office area. The cable storage area shall be fenced in
and used as the secure store. In this area cable drums may be stored for extended periods during
the progressing construction of the power station, which takes several years.
b. New and opened drums shall be protected against climatic influences. Drums shall not be stored
directly on the ground but rather on wooden or other beams to permit drainage of rainwater and
prevent rotting of the drums. Drums shall be rotated through 180o on a yearly basis. To prevent
ingress of moisture and therefore corrosion, cable ends on returned drums may not be left open. The
sealing of the cable ends shall be by means of heat shrink caps.
c. As protection of the outer cable layer against UV-radiation, slats shall not be removed from unused
drums. Drums returned to the store after usage shall be protected again on return against
deterioration of the outer cable layer through UV-radiation by means of temporary protection like
tarpaulins, partial covering with slats or by moving it indoors.
3.7 Sealing of holes in floors and walls and fire barriers
3.7.1 Coating of cables in vicinity of fire barriers
To increase the fire survivability of the installation fire retardant coatings shall be applied onto certain
critical cable runs as well as at all cable entries though fire barriers or building walls. The coating shall be
applied over a distance of five metres from both sides of the barrier or wall.
3.7.2 Fire barriers
a. Fire barriers shall be installed wherever electrical cables pass through wall, floors and ceilings,
inside low and medium voltage switchboards, generator protection panels, battery chargers, UPSs’
which are boundary elements of a specified fire zone. Fire barriers shall be in accordance with GGS
0183 and SANS 10142-1.
b. Fire barriers have a fire rating of two hours minimum in compliance with the fire resistance criteria for
insulation, stability and integrity as specified by recognised testing institutions and their standards.
c. Test certificates are provided with fire barriers in accordance with:
SANS 10177-2, Fire testing of materials, components and elements used in buildings Part 2: Fire
resistance test for building elements.
IEEE 634: 1978, Testing for Fire Rated Penetration Seals.
ASTM E814: Fire Test of through Penetration Fire Stops.
3.7.3 Sealing of opening in floors and walls
a. Wherever cables pass through holes or slots in floors and walls or enter or leave sleeve pipes in
floors or walls; the openings shall be sealed with vermiculite plaster or other material approved by
the Engineer. This material shall be domed or slightly raised towards the centre to prevent the
accumulation of water or oil in the seal. The sealing material shall be water resistant and provides a
barrier for smoke and toxic fumes.
b. Waterproof fire seals are separately priced and only installed in places indicated by the Employer.
c. In the case where cable sheaths are incompatible with barrier material, the cable shall be protected
through the floor or wall by instamatic paint so that the sealing material is not in direct contact with
the cable at any point.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
This document is a standard for the procurement of power station low voltage electric motors. The
requirements in this standard shall be followed to ensure that the Eskom motor design base is
maintained.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This standard specifies the minimum Eskom’s requirements for the procurement, design, manufacture,
testing, transport, delivery, installation and commissioning of new low voltage electric motors.
2.1.1 Purpose
The objectives of this standard are to:
a. Provide a source of information for Power Station personnel when purchasing reliable low voltage
motors for either replacing the existing motors or spares or for new plants.
b. Provide material that should be agreed upon and/or exchanged between the Employer (Eskom) and
the Supplier. Such material includes technical schedules, quality control and assurance, tests and
data packs.
c. Ensure that the Employer receives and accepts a high quality asset that is efficient, reliable and
maintainable throughout its intended service life.
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Limited Divisions.
a. The requirements are for the procurement and supply of new motors whose voltage rating is below
1000V.
b. There may be additional requirements with regard to electrical and mechanical components for
motors to be used with variable speed drives or at nuclear sites or specialized operating systems
and environments. The standard elements of this standard should, however, still be applicable and
useful to specialized motors. It is understood that some elements of this standard may be adapted
and additional information added through the scope of work for specialized motors and applications.
c. This standard takes precedence over any other standards mentioned in 2.2.
2.1.3 Exclusions
a. Detailed requirements for motors to be procured for specialized applications and environments.
b. While this standard contains quality control and assurance requirements, it does not cover all
material and workmanship issues that shall be addressed by the Supplier and/or OEM through a
duly certified ISO 9001:2008 quality management system.
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
2.2.1 Normative
[1] Low Voltage Induction Motors Technical Schedule A&B Template Document number 240-
77100923
[2] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
2.2.2 Informative
[3] Eskom 240-56361435:Rev. 0 2009, Transport of Power Station Electric Motors
[4] Eskom 240-56360387: Storage of Power Station Electric Motors
[5] SANS 1804-1:2007, IEC Requirements.
[6] SANS 1804-2:2007, Low voltage three-phase standard motors.
[7] SANS 1804-4:2006, Single phase motors.
[8] SANS IEC 60034-1:2006, Rotating electrical machines. Part 1: Rating and performance.
[9] SANS IEC 60034-2-1:2008, Rotating electrical machines. Part 2: Standard methods of determining
losses and efficiency from test (excluding machines for traction vehicles).
[10] SANS IEC 60034-5:2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 5: Degrees of protection provided by
the integral design of rotating electrical machines. (IP Code)- Classification.
[11] SANS IEC 60034-6:1991, Rotating electrical machines. Part 6: Methods of cooling. (IC code).
[12] SANS IEC 60034-7:2001, Rotating electrical machines. Part 7: Classification of types of
construction, mounting arrangements and terminal box position. (IM Code).
[13] SANS IEC 60034-8:2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 8: Terminal markings and direction of
rotating of rotating machines.
[14] SANS IEC 60034-9: 2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 9: Noise limits.
[15] SANS IEC 60034-11: 2005, Rotating electrical machines. Part 11: Thermal protection.
[16] SANS IEC 60034-12:2008, Rotating electrical machines. Part 12: Starting performance of single-
speed three-phase cage induction motors.
[17] SANS IEC 60034-14:2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 14: Mechanical vibration of certain
machines with shaft heights 56mm and higher – Measurement, evaluation and limits of vibration
severity.
[18] SANS IEC 60034-17:2006, Rotating electrical machines. Part 17: Cage Induction motors when fed
from converters- Application guide.
[19] SANS IEC 60034-26: 2006, Rotating electrical machines. Part 26: Effects of unbalanced voltages
on the performance of three-phase cage induction motors.
[20] SANS IEC 60034-28: 2007, Rotating electrical machines. Part 28: Test methods for determining
quantities of equivalent circuit diagrams for three-phase low-voltage cage induction motors.
[21] SANS IEC 60034-30: 2008, Rotating electrical machines. Part 30 Efficiency classes of single-
speed, three-phase, cage-induction motors (IE-code).
[22] SANS IEC 60072-1:1991, Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines. Part 1:
Frame numbers 56 to 400 and flange numbers 55 to 1080.
[23] SANS IEC 60072-2:1990, Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines. Part 2:
Frame numbers 355 to 1000 and flange numbers 1180 to 2360.
[24] SANS 1091:2004, National colour standards for paint.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
[25] IEEE 112: 2004, IEEE standard test procedure for polyphase induction motors and generators
[26] The South African grid code –Network code Rev. 8.
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
Controlled Disclosure Controlled Disclosure to external parties (either enforced by law, or discretionary).
Employer The Eskom business unit purchasing electrical motors to which this document is
applicable.
Supplier The company performing the scope of work as per this standard.
2.3.1 Classification
Controlled Disclosure: Controlled Disclosure to External Parties (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
IE International Efficiency – efficiency Class
IE1 Standard efficiency (equivalent to EFF2)
IE2 High efficiency (equivalent to EFF1)
IE3 Premium efficiency
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers.
IR Insulation resistance.
LV Low Voltage.
PI Polarisation index
SANS South African National Standards
2.5 Roles and responsibilities
None
2.6 Process for monitoring
None
2.7 Related/supporting documents
The requirements in this standard supersede the low voltage requirements in 240-56357518.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3. Procurement of power station low voltage motors standard
3.1 Technical requirements
3.1.1 General Requirements
a. All motors shall be designed, manufactured, tested and perform in accordance with the latest
revision of SANS IEC 60034 and also comply with this standard.
b. The motor Supplier shall take into consideration all relevant characteristics and operating conditions
pertaining to the driven machine and the motor environment and shall be responsible for designing
or selecting from a standard range, a motor that will perform as required by the purchaser.
c. The preference is for motors to be selected from a standard range. Where this is not possible, the
Employer shall be notified for approval on non-standard motor design. For replacements, the
responsible person shall make sure that the new motor is interchangeable with the old motor or as
stated in the contract.
d. Only service proven designs (all components) shall be tendered. If a design has a component/s that
has/ve not been proven for at least two years in service, the affected parts and the extent of their
experience shall be declared in the tender/proposal.
e. Motors shall not be under-loaded (e.g. loading below 75%) unless otherwise specified in Appendix
C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923) and is required by the application. The
loading of 75% of rated output power and above (75% - 90%) is required for better efficiency, power
factor and power utilization. The design shall have reasonable design margin of at least 10% to
accommodate power supply variations in Appendix C: Technical Schedule-A&B, reduced cooling
and system inefficiency during the life of the plant.
f. A minimum efficiency class code of IE3 for S1 duty and intermittent duty with 80% or higher cyclic
duration factor motors shall be supplied for new plants and replacements. Reliable motors with high
efficiency, high power factor and low input power consumption values are required to support the
Eskom Energy Efficiency drive.
g. Electric motors for converter applications shall be selected and sized to accommodate additional
losses and stresses associated with converters (electric drives) in order to maintain the motor
service life.
h. The Supplier to confirm all the interfacing with related equipment and subcontractors to ensure the
motor will function reliably within the required environment. The Employer to be made aware of all
shortcomings and risks which may affect the functioning of the motor.
3.1.2 Electrical Details
3.1.2.1 Motor Rating
a. The motor ratings shall be specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-
77100923) of an enquiry document.
b. Motor voltage and power ratings shall be in accordance with Appendix A unless otherwise specified
in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923) or if the application requires an
optimized/economic solution which differs from Appendix A requirements.
c. The kilowatt (kW) rating of each motor shall not be less than the maximum operating design loading
(in kW) of the driven machine.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.1.2.2 Power Supply Variation
a. The standard parameters of the power supply system (Grid Code requirement) under normal and
abnormal conditions are listed in Appendix C. Motors shall be suitable for use on the system
specified for the particular application.
b. Under normal power supply conditions, motors shall be capable of:
b1. Running continuously at rated output without exceeding the temperature rises permitted in
3.1.2.3b as per SANS IEC 60034-1,
b2. The specified number of starts per hour and momentary overload in accordance with SANS
IEC 60034-1 without exceeding the motor insulation class temperature rise.
c. Under sustained abnormal conditions specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template
240-77100923), motors shall be capable of starting and driving the driven equipment without
exceeding the motor insulation class temperature rise.
d. Under transient abnormal conditions specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template
240-77100923), motors shall continue operating without damage and without exceeding the motor
insulation class temperature rise.
3.1.2.3 Temperature Class Limits
a. The stator windings shall be insulated with a Class F (155°C) or higher insulation system such a
Class H (180°C).
b. The winding temperature rise at rated output shall not exceed 80K above the maximum
coolant/ambient temperature of 40oC (Class B Insulation temperature rise) measured using the
resistance method. This is applicable for both Direct-on-Line and converter-driven motors.
3.1.2.4 Starting Current Requirements
a. Motors shall be suitable for direct-on-line starting unless otherwise specified in Appendix C
Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
b. Motors shall be designed for at least three consecutive starts per hour when initially cold. Motors
shall be designed for at least two consecutive starts per hour when hot.
c. Valve actuator motors, boiler damper motors, float operated motors and motors used for control and
regulating functions shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour.
d. The direct-on-line starting currents for cage induction motors under normal conditions on the
specified power supply shall not exceed the following values:
e1. 8 per unit for standard motors (IE1),
e2. 9 per unit for high efficient motors (IE2) and premium efficiency motors (IE3).
Lower starting currents are preferred. Motors with lower starting currents, high efficiency and high power
factor shall be considered.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.1.2.5 Starting Torque Requirements
a. Motors shall be capable of accelerating the driven load from standstill to full speed and operate the
driven equipment taking into account the load inertia, load torque, and power supply variations
provided in this standard.
b. Unless otherwise specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923), the
pull-up torque and breakdown torque shall not be less than the values specified in SANS IEC
60034-12.
c. The minimum difference between the motor torque and load torque under normal supply condition
shall not be less than 10% at any speed to avoid stalling during starting.
3.1.2.6 Tolerance
Motor efficiencies, power factors and torques guaranteed by suppliers shall not be subject to decreases
in respect of tolerances of any kind. Similarly, guaranteed starting currents shall not be subject to
increases for any reason.
3.1.3 Mechanical Details
3.1.3.1 Inter-Changeability of Parts
All corresponding parts of all motors of the same type and size from the same manufacturer shall be
interchangeable.
3.1.3.2 Stator Windings and Insulating System
a. Vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) stator windings are preferred. The continuous resin flow
process is also acceptable. Any other winding impregnation system should be approved by the
Employer.
b. End-windings shall withstand direct-on-line starting under maximum voltage conditions.
c. The connections between the windings and terminals shall carry the maximum starting current for
the worst case run-up time without overheating, and shall withstand the forces arising from the
starting current without damage.
d. Motors for converter applications shall be supplied with insulation system that can withstand voltage
spikes, rise time and harmonics without damage or loss of life.
3.1.3.3 Stator Core and Winding
a. The stator core and winding of motors 55kW and above shall be constructed as a separate entity
thus allowing for easy repair and replacement of the winding if necessary.
b. The core laminations shall have no ragged edges before stacking.
3.1.3.4 Rotor, Shaft and Coupling
a. Die-cast aluminium, Die-cast copper and fabricated copper rotors are allowed.
b. For copper bar rotors, the laminations shall be fixed to the shaft so that the maximum torque is
transmitted without distortion of, and without separation between, the rotor laminations.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
c. For copper bar rotors, precautions shall be taken for the case where a rotor bar breaks that it will not
come out of the rotor slot and damage the stator winding.
d. Unused shaft extensions shall be enclosed in robust metal covers.
e. Shaft ends shall be protected from corrosion.
f. Dimensions of shaft ends and keys shall comply with the relevant standards in Section 2.2.
g. When the complete coupling for each motor drive is provided by the Supplier of the driven machine,
the motor manufacturer shall be responsible for its fitting and balancing.
3.1.3.5 Bearings
a. In general, motor bearings and lubrication shall be of the same type as those of the driven machine.
b. The bearing type shall be anti-friction (ball or roller) bearing unless otherwise specified in Appendix
C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
c. Ball and/or roller bearings shall be conservatively loaded: grease renewal periods shall be not less
than 4000 hours. Grease relief devices shall be provided to prevent over-greasing and shall
discharge excess grease external to the motor from an easily accessible position.
d. The greasing arrangements for ball and roller bearings shall be such that greasing can be carried
out safely while the motor is running. Greasing facilities shall be easily accessible when the motor is
in service.
e. The life of ball/roller bearings, calculated by an approved method, shall be at least 40 000 hours
(L10). Air Cooled Condenser (ACC) motors shall have at least 100 000 hours (L10).
f. Motor with frame size up to 180 may include life-lubricated tight bearings that require no
maintenance throughout its service life.
g. Motors for converter applications shall be supplied with insulated bearings to limit circulating
currents.
h. The bearing for immersed motors may be lubricated by the fluid conveyed.
3.1.3.6 Enclosure and Cooling
a. Motors shall be of standard dimensions as specified in relevant standards in Section 2.2
b. All motors for use in hazardous area (e.g. oil pumps) shall be non-sparking, flame-proof and
explosion-proof.
c. Separate motor driven fans for motor cooling will not be accepted unless in low speeds converter
application. Approval is required from the Employer. Motor oversizing to cater for low speed
converter application is the preferred option.
d. The motor housings for power station motors shall be made of either cast iron or fabricated steel.
Aluminum motors will only be considered for small motors outside the cast iron frame range.
e. Vertical motors shall be provided with cowls to prevent the accumulation of foreign matter and water
on the motor.
f. The enclosures (IP code) for general purpose indoors motors, outdoor motors, and material handling
(coal and ash) plant shall be as stated in Appendix B.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
g. Cooling methods shall be as stated in Appendix B unless otherwise specified in Appendix C:
Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
3.1.3.7 Terminal Boxes
a. Motors shall be provided with approved terminating fittings for the required cables. Where a
particular type and size of motor is supplied for several different applications, the arrangement of
cable terminating fittings shall permit inter-changeability of motors and allow one spare motor to
serve for all applications without having to modify the existing cable arrangement.
b. Horizontal motors smaller than 355 frame sizes may be fitted with terminal boxes that allow cable
entry from any one of four positions, 90 ° apart, on top of the motor.
c. Terminal boxes shall be provided complete with the internal parts. The cable glands plugs shall be
fitted in the cable entries. Cable glands shall be supplied if requested in the enquiry document.
d. Terminal box lids shall be with “lips” over the terminal box flange, so that the gasket will not be
exposed to water and dust.
e. Cable tail support bars within the terminal boxes shall be made from non-hygroscopic insulating
material.
f. The dimensions of terminal boxes and cable boxes shall be adequate for accommodating the sizes
and types of cable specified. The design of the terminal box shall permit the removal of the motor
without the need to disturb the termination or bend the cable appreciably.
g. All auxiliary terminal boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the circuits for which they are
provided. Labels shall be of brass or stainless steel with permanent markings, and shall be securely
attached to the motor.
3.1.3.8 Motor Terminals, Connections and Rotation
a. Main terminals and motor leads shall be permanently marked with the letters U-V-W, reading from
left to right, if horizontally arranged, or top to bottom, if vertically arranged, when facing the terminal
box.
b. Internal leads to reverse the motor rotation shall be easily interchangeable.
c. Motors with only one shaft extension shall rotate in a clockwise direction when looking on the drive
end, irrespective of the direction of rotation required on site, when the U-V-W supply leads of a
phase rotation system rising in that order, are connected to the motor terminals U-V-W respectively.
d. Each motor shall be provided with an earth terminal mounted.
e. For motors rated above 550 V, the leads between the motor windings and terminals shall pass
through bushes or sealing devices to separate the motor interior from the terminal box.
3.1.3.9 Rating Plate and Labels
a. The rating plate shall give the information specified in SANS 1804 and IEC 60034-30.
b. All information on the rating plate or any other plate detailing information shall be marked
permanently on securely attached brass or stainless steel plates
c. In addition to the information shown on the rating plate, the following information, if not included in
the rating plate, shall be included separately on the motor casing,
c1. make and type of bearings;
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
c2. grade and type of lubricating oil/grease;
c3. recommended greasing intervals;
c4. bearing reference numbers for ball/roller bearings;
c5. permissible starting intervals.
c6. the IE code and efficiency shall be durable marked on the rating plate
c7. the SABS mark.
3.1.3.10 Corrosion Protection and Paint Finishes
3.1.3.10.1 Paint Finishes
a. The internal surfaces of terminal boxes and motor frames shall be given an approved corrosion-
proofing treatment.
b. All external surfaces for new manufactured designs shall be finished with an outer coat of enamel of
the colour specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923). Off the
shelve motors can be supplied with their original colours.
c. Any standard painting procedure that differs from these requirements shall be submitted to the
Employer for prior approval.
3.1.3.10.2 Noise and Vibration
a. The noise levels shall not exceed the levels given in SANS IEC 60034-9.
b. Levels of vibration generated within motors when running on their own shall not exceed the levels
given in SANS IEC 60034-14.
3.1.4 Accessories
3.1.4.1 Temperature Measuring Devices
a. At least one dual type thermistor shall be provided on all crane motors, actuator motors and other
short-time rated motors that could overheat as a result of the driven device jamming. The
thermistors shall work with the protection relays provided by the Supplier of the control gear.
b. Should there be abnormal alarm and trip requirements, the motor Supplier shall be responsible for
informing the Employer of the required alarm and trip settings for the equipment monitoring the
thermistors, ETD or thermocouples.
c. The thermistors, ETD or thermocouples shall be fitted in a separate terminal box. Terminal boxes
shall be clearly labelled to indicate the circuits for which they are provided. Labels shall be of brass
or stainless steel with permanent markings, and shall be securely attached to the motor.
3.1.4.2 Space Heaters
a. Space heaters are only required for motors exposed to low temperatures or high humidity areas
which could results in condensation during standby operation or outage. The Employer Engineer
has to approve the installation of heaters in critical and non-critical motors depending on the
prevailing conditions. Motors that come standard with space heaters are acceptable.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
b. The space heaters shall be designed to operate on 230V AC.
c. Separate terminal boxes are preferred. Terminal boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the
circuits for which they are provided. Labels shall be of brass or stainless steel with permanent
markings, and shall be securely attached to the motor.
3.2 Quality assurance and testing
3.2.1 Quality of Material and Workmanship
a. All material shall be new and of the quality required. Unless otherwise specified or approved all
material shall comply with the most recent South African Standards applicable or better.
b. No welding, burning in, filling, plugging up or metal deposition to correct defects in any component
will be permitted unless agreed to by the Employer in writing, following an inspection of the defect by
the Employer or its authorized representative.
3.2.1.1 Inspection and Testing
3.2.1.1.1 Inspection and Witnessing of Tests
a. The contractor shall give the Employer not less than seven days’ notice of when the inspection may
be undertaken. Motors despatched to site without the required inspection, may be returned at the
Supplier’s cost, at the Employer’s discretion or as stated in the contract.
b. For motors of 200 kW and larger, an inspection and test plan shall be submitted for approval or as
stated in the contract.
c. Type tests shall be witnessed by the Employer and/or an authority, independent of the Supplier or
contractor or as stated in the contract.
3.2.1.1.2 Type Tests
a. The first motor of each size and type manufactured shall be performance tested to prove compliance
with the quoted performance. Type test certificates on identical motors may, at the Employer’s
discretion, be accepted in lieu of these tests.
b. All performance tests shall be in accordance with SANS IEC 60034-1 and SANS 1804. The
permissible temperature rise motors shall be in accordance with the limits specified in clause 4.2.3
The temperature rise of the stator windings shall be measured by the winding resistance method
3.2.1.1.3 Routine Tests
a. Each motor shall be tested at the manufacturer’s works for no load current, vibration, locked rotor,
insulation resistance, high voltage and winding resistances.
b. All motors larger than 200 kW shall be subjected to a no load bearing run for long enough to allow
the bearing temperatures to reach equilibrium.
All routine tests shall be in accordance with SANS IEC 60034-1 and SANS 1804.
3.2.1.1.4 Test Certificates
a. The routine and type test certificates shall be submitted to the Employer for approval 30 days before
the delivery date of the motors.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
b. Type test certificates shall show power factor and efficiency figures calculated from the test results
for 100 %, 75 % and 50 % of full load conditions.
c. Motor test results shall be recorded on the Employer standard form. The Supplier’s template is
acceptable if it is comprehensive and covers all the details required by the Employer.
3.2.2 Delivery, Erection and Commissioning
a. Delivery, erection and commissioning arrangement shall be as per contract conditions and agreed
by both parties.
b. Motors shall not be delivered without agreement of readiness to receive them. Motors delivered
without such approval may be returned at the Supplier’s expense for later delivery at no extra cost to
the purchaser.
c. Where erection and commissioning are specified in the contract, the following requirements shall be
met.
3.2.2.1 Erection
a. When the motors are erected, care shall be taken to ensure interchange-ability with replacement
motors.
3.2.2.2 Bearing Inspection
All motor bearings shall be inspected by the Employer’s representative on site. On motors fitted with
ball/roller bearings, the grease shall be examined prior to commissioning to ensure that it is not hard. If
no roughness is felt when the shaft is rotated by hand and if the motor runs without undue noise or
vibration, the bearings will be considered acceptable. If the bearings fail or exhibit the symptoms of
brinelling during the guarantee period they shall be replaced by the contractor, free of charge and
without delay.
3.2.2.3 Alignment
a. The motors, base plates and embedded parts shall be positioned by the party specified in the
contract
b. After erection, the alignment of the half-couplings between the motor and the driven machine shall
be measured.
3.2.2.4 Drying Out
a. The contractor shall satisfy himself that each motor is dry before it is connected to the supply. Any
motor that fails as a result of being commissioned in a damp condition shall be repaired at the
expense of the contractor responsible for commissioning.
b. Equipment and personnel to do the drying-out shall be provided by the contractor responsible for
commissioning.
c. Failure of the contractor to achieve approval of the dry-out shall entitle the Employer to reject the
motor concerned.
d. Motors ordered as spares shall be delivered to the specified store and need not be dried out by the
Contractor provided the motors meet the approved criteria before despatch or on delivery, at the
Employer’s discretion.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.3 Documentation
3.3.1 Motor Documentation Requirement at Tender Phase
Detailed information and drawings to enable the Employer to make a complete and fair technical
analysis of the tender/s shall be supplied for the proposed motor design. The required details shall
include but not limited to the following:
a. Preliminary outline drawing indicating motor mounting dimensions, shaft height, shaft diameter and
coupling detail, maximum overall dimensions, weight for total motor.
b. A completed Technical Schedule-A&B in Appendix C.
c. Grid code compliance requirements in Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
3.3.2 Motor Documentation Requirement After Contract Award.
The following information shall be provided by the Supplier to the Employer for detailed design review,
comment, and acceptance:
a. Detail outline drawing indicating certified motor mounting dimensions, shaft height, shaft diameter
and coupling detail, maximum overall dimensions, weight for total motor, interface location for
terminal boxes (main power supply, auxiliary, and accessories). The rated kW output, speed, supply
voltage, line current, frequency and phases shall be clearly shown.
b. Detailed drawings of the motor base plate showing full construction details with dimensions (where
applicable).
c. Power winding diagrams and connection diagrams for auxiliaries (heaters, thermistors, PT100, etc).
d. A completed version of Technical Schedule-A&B that shall, where necessary, show revised data
due to the motor detailed design.
e. Torque and Current versus Speed Curves for the motor at 100% and 90% motor rated voltage for
motor. The torque versus speed curves shall include the driven load torque versus speed curve to
show accelerating torque margins for motors 55 kW and above.
f. Efficiency and Power Factor versus Load Curves from 50% to 100% load, in 25% increments, at
rated voltage.
g. Thermal limit curves for motors 55kW motors and above.
h. Start-up times and stall times of the motor at 100% and 90% of the rated voltage.
i. Nameplate drawing with all details to be contained therein.
j. A Quality Control, Inspection and Test Plan for Employer review, influence and approval.
k. An equivalency/interchangeability review for the new versus existing motor designs.
No manufacturing or delivery of motors should be allowed before the designs are finalized and accepted
by the Employer. The Employer has the right to reject any motor delivered to site without the signed
documentation mentioned above at the Supplier‘s cost
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
3.3.3 Motor Documentation Requirement prior to scheduled delivery
Information shall be submitted to the Employer for review and approval, and to prepare for motor
installation and commissioning.
a. A copy of Installation, Operating and Maintenance Manual. Information contained in this manual
shall include but not limited to:
a1. Installation instructions.
a2. Operating instructions, including starting limitations.
a3. Maintenance requirements and data.
a4. Instructions on how to completely disassemble and assemble the motor for major inspections,
repairs and overhauls.
a5. Replacement parts catalogue.
a6. Storage requirements.
a7. Trouble shooting guide.
b. Required Type test certificates and Routine certificates.
c. All signed drawings specified as required in 3.3.2
d. Signed Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
e. Signed Torque vs. speed curves and current vs. speed curves. Signed Efficiency and Power factor
vs. load curves. Signed Thermal limit curves for 55kW motors and above
f. Signed Quality control plan.
The Employer has the right to reject any motor delivered to site without the documentation mentioned
above at the Supplier‘s cost
3.4 Labelling
All labels shall be in English and the wording is subject to Employer’s approval. Abbreviations to
descriptions shall not be acceptable. Where abbreviations are unavoidable due to database field
length limitations or limited number of characters available on labels, the abbreviations shall be in
accordance with the Employer’s abbreviation standard. Labels for removable items shall be mounted
alongside the item, and not fixed to the item itself.
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
4. Authorisation
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Gert Brink Arnot Power Station – Motor Engineer
Riaan Grobler Camden Power Station – Motor Engineer
Bright Nelufhangani Duvha Power Station – Motor Engineer
Mthokozi Ngwane Hendrina Power Station – Motor Engineer
Tose Tose Komati Power Station – Motor Engineer
Daan Dreyer Kriel Power Station – Motor Engineer
Buhle Nyembe Lethabo Power Station – Motor Engineer
Sabelo Nene Tutuka Power Station – Motor Engineer
Nonkululeko Mabaso Manager Engineering - Electrical Design Application CoE
Dyke Monyane Group Technology Electrical – LV Switchgear Engineer
5. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
November 2012 0.1 MJ Manyage Draft Document for review created from 474-235
May 2013 1 MJ Manyage Final Document for Publication
July 2016 1.1 MJ Manyage 1. Changes from Specification to Standard and Title
2. Changes in title page signatories from TDAC to SCOT
3. Appendix C Template removed and referenced as a
separate Approved Template 240-77100923 to avoid
duplication.
July 2016 2 MJ Manyage Final Document for Authorisation and Publication Rev 2
September 2018 2.1 MJ Manyage Changes in Table 2, Appendix B. No Review completed
September 2018 3 MJ Manyage Final Document for Authorisation and Publication Rev 3
6. Development team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
Sithembile Tshanini Group Technology – Electrical
Buhle Nyembe Lethabo Power Station – EPE
Gert Brink Arnot Power Station – EPE
Marubini Manyage Group Technology – Electrical
Mosiwa Maibi Kriel Power Station – EPE
Verwey Fourie Komati Power Station – CED
7. Acknowledgements
None
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix a: motor voltages
A.1 Motor voltages are normally based on the following table, but shall be as specified in Technical
Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923) of an enquiry document. Cable types and sizes shall be as
specified in Appendix C: Technical Schedule A&B (Template 240-77100923).
Table 1: Motor Voltages
Rated output Voltage rating
All AC motors below 1 kW 230V/400 V
1 kW to 200 kW 380V/400 V
or
1 kW to 355 kW 525V/660V/690V
A.2 New (or upgrade) application requirements may deviate from this range. A life cycle cost shall be
done for new applications and has to be approved by the Employer Engineer
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix b: motor rating classes
B.1 The following table reflects the usual rating class, type of enclosure, and method of cooling
applicable to motors for particular duties. The minimum enclosure rating shall be IP55. The dusty
environments enclosure rating shall be IP65.
Table 2: Motor Rating Classes, Enclosures and Cooling Methods
1 2 3 4
Cooling
Motors for Rating class Type of enclosure
method
a. Boilers Bulk oil pumps
(S1/S3) IC 411 For Zone 1: Flame-proof (Ex d)
For Zone 2: Non-sparking (Ex nA)
b. Turbo-generators Oil pumps (S1/S3) IC 411
For Zone 1: Flame-proof (Ex d)
For Zone 2: Non-sparking (Ex nA)
c. Coal, ash, lime and soda IP65 for non-classified areas
plant material handling
(S1/S3) ic 411
For Zone 21: Dust Ignition proof (Ex tD IP65)
For Zone 22: Dust Ignition proof (Ex tD IP65)
d. General purpose (S1/S3) IP 55 IC 411
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix c: technical schedule a&b
Refer to Low Voltage Induction Motors Technical Schedule A&B Template Document number 24077100923
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix d: standard form for type test certificates
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix e: standard form for routine test certificates
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix f: deviation schedule
Deviation schedule
1. Any deviations/modifications/alternatives offered to the standard 240-57617975 shall be listed
below with reasons for the departures.
2. No deviations/modifications/alternatives offered to the standard will be recognised unless listed on
this schedule.
If no deviations/modifications/alternatives are offered, this schedule must be marked N/A.
Standard Standard
Page number Clause number Proposed deviation/modification/alternative
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Appendix g: motor document submittal programme
Low voltage motor documentation requirements
Document submittal programme project activity
Review review review review review review review documents details of activities testing freeze tendering installation handover pre-enquiry design inspection/release maintenance pre-commissioning acceptance
& Final
Fat
Document
ID description type
1 Motor technical requirements (Works Information) soft copy E E
240-77100923: LV Motor IM Technical Schedule A&B
2 Template (Completed Schedule A) soft copy E E
240-57617975: New Low Voltage Motors Procurement
Standard 3 soft copy E E
4 240-56360387: Storage of Electric Motors Standard soft copy E E
240-56361435: Transport of Power Station electric motors
standard 5 soft copy E E
Preferred motor suppliers/vendors list (Applicability based
E e
6 on contract strategy) soft copy
Tender Returnable (Preliminary)
Completed Motor Technical Schedule A&B Hard and
7 7.1 Template 240-77100923 soft copy T
Hard and
7.2 Dimension outline drawings soft copy T
Final Design Documents (for review before
manufacturing)
Completed Motor Technical Schedule A&B Hard and
8.1 Template 240-77100923 soft copy C
Hard and
8.2 Motor torque-speed curves for all motors soft copy C
Motor torque-speed curves superimposed on Hard and
8.3 driven machine load curves for 55kW and above soft copy C
8 Hard and
C
8.4 Motor current-speed curves soft copy
Thermal-time curves (Motor damage curves for Hard and
C
8.5 55kW and above) soft copy
Hard and
C
8.6 Detail Dimension outline drawings soft copy
Hard and
8.7 Power winding diagrams soft copy C
Auxiliaries connection diagrams (thermistors, Hard and
8.8 heaters, PT100, etc.) soft copy C
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
New Low Voltage Motors Procurement Standard Unique Identifier: 240-57617975
Revision: 3
Page:
Quality control plan (For all Motors above Hard and
8.9 200kW) soft copy C
Manufacturing, Transportation and Storage (for review
before equipment release)
Hard and
9.1 Type test report soft copy C
Hard and
9 9.2 Routine test report soft copy C
Hard and
9.3 Transport and storage procedures soft copy C
Hard and
9.4 Installation, operating and maintenance manuals soft copy C
Motor Data Pack (final equipment documentation - Hard and
Signed copies) soft copy
Completed Motor Technical Schedule A&B Hard and
10.1 Template 240-77100923 soft copy C C
Motor torque-speed, current-speed, speed-time, Hard and
10.2 thermal-time curves soft copy C C
Hard and
10.3 Dimension Outline Drawings soft copy C C
Hard and
10.4 Power winding diagrams soft copy C C
Auxiliaries connection diagrams (thermistors, Hard and
10 10.5 heaters, PT100, etc.) soft copy C C
Hard and
10.6 Quality control plan soft copy C C
Hard and
10.7 Type test report soft copy C C
Hard and
10.8 Routine test report soft copy C C
Hard and
10.9 Transport and storage procedures soft copy C C
Hard and
12.10 Installation, operating and maintenance manuals soft copy C C
Commissioning
Hard and
11.1 Commissioning procedure soft copy C C
Hard and
11.2 Pre-, cold and hot commissioning report soft copy C C
C – Contractor
E - Employer
O - Others
T - Tenderer
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
The need arose to consolidate all Eskom Drawing Office Standards to improve and streamline
consistency in the Engineering Divisions.
SmartPlant is being deployed at Eskom to manage technical data and documents related to power
Generation plants.
Distribution and Transmission plants are not in scope for the current programme.
An engineering drawing, a type of technical drawing, is used to fully and clearly define requirements for
items to be engineered or manufactured.
Engineering drawing (the activity of drafting) produces engineering drawings. More than merely the
drawing of pictures, it is also a type of language, a graphical language that communicates ideas and
information from one mind to another. Most importantly, it communicates all needed information from the
engineer who designed a part to the people who will make it.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This document defines general rules and code of practices to be followed by all designers and drafters to
produce design drawings of consistent and professional quality. The accuracy and adequacy of the
design and drafting work and its compliance with the applicable standards remain the responsibility of
the designer or draftsperson. Nothing contained in this standard shall be construed as relieving the
designer or drafter of the individual responsibility for producing quality drawings.
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to define the standard and requirements that must be followed by all
internal Eskom Drawing offices(s) and Contractors, for production and control of all Eskom Drawings
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Soc Ltd – Generation, Plant Engineering and All
Eskom Contractors
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
2.2.2 Informative
[2] 240-83904158 – CADD Office Workflow Guideline
[3] 240-85194150 – EPSS CADD Office Work Request form
[4] 32-6 Eskom Documentation Management Procedure
[5] 36-1 Standard for Management Systems Document, Correspondence and Records
[6] 36-2 Writing and Controlling Management Systems Documents
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
[7] 240-109607662 Eskom Plant Labelling Abbreviation Standard
[8] 240-71432150 Plant Labelling Standard
[9] 240-73143217 Eskom RDS-PP Coding Standard
[10] 240-93576498 KKS Coding Standard
[11] 240-109607942 Eskom RDS-PP Key Part Standard
[12] 240-58552870 SmartPlant for Owner Operators (SPO) Document Metadata Standard
[13] 240-110409882 Functional Specification for SharePoint Portal in support of SPO Transmittal
Management
[14] 240-110409934 User Requirements Specification (URS) for a Collaboration Platform to
supplement SmartPlant
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
As Built Drawing Drawing which is verified as an exact representation of a plant or a section of
a plant that has been completely built.
Check Print Drawing which is printed and utilized for verification of a drawing during the
drawing checking procedure.
Contractor A party appointed by Eskom to render services.
Data Mining For the purposes of this standard Data Mining shall be the extraction of Text
Tagged data from Computer-aided Drafting (CAD) drawings.
Controlled Copy A copy of a document held by a documentation/satellite centre or by a
designated individual that has the guarantee that it is the latest and current
valid revision. This copy shall be clearly stamped in red ‘CONTROLLED
COPY’. All controlled documents that are printed will be considered valid for a
maximum period of 24 hours. Users shall always reference back to the EDMS
for the latest version of a document.
Deviation/Notification Process This process is the initiator of engineering activities to permanently address
plant deficiencies or incidents.
Draftsperson A person responsible for the creation and updating of drawings, in
accordance with this standard.
Functional Process Flow Diagram showing all or a recognizable portion of the process, complete with a
Diagram (FPFD) material and/or heat balance sheet. It contains details of operating
parameters such as flow rate, temperature and pressure.
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram which shows limited details of the mechanical and electrical
Diagram (P&ID) components, pipework and ducting, and identifies all the measuring points
and control elements that are necessary to measure and control that process.
Plant System A collection of plant components connected in such a way that each will
perform a unique process, thereby achieving specified performance
parameters.
Preliminary A drawing which is produced to convey ideas and proposals prior to approval
and which has not been accepted for construction. The approved Preliminary
drawings are used for the implementation on site, there after the as built
drawings will be marked up and updated.
Primary Process Flow Diagram Diagram which indicates the major process as well as the process values
(PPFD) through all or most of the main plant items of a given power station or system.
Project Configuration Files The customized set-up files that must be utilized in conjunction standard
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Definition Description
Eskom tools Piping and Instrumentation Diagram/Process and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID).
Secondary Process Flow Secondary process flow diagram is similar to the Primary Process Flow
Diagram (SPFD) Diagram (PPFD), except that it only deals with one particular system or
subsystem of plant, and in more detail.
Text Tagging For the purposes of this standard Text Tagging shall be the process of adding
electronic text tags into a CAD drawing for the purpose of data mining.
2.3.1 Disclosure Classification
Public Domain: Published in any public forum without constraints (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
AKZ Anlagen Kenn Zeichnungs System (Identification System for Power Stations)
BU Business Unit
CAD Computer Aided Drafting
DGN Bentley MicroStation Drawing File Extension
DWG/DXF- AutoCAD Drawing File Extensions
ECSA Engineering Council South Africa
EDMS Electronic Document Management System
EPSS Engineering Process & System Support
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IT Information Technology
KKS Kraftwerk Kennzeichen System (Identification System for Power Stations)
MDL Master Document List
MWP Megawatt Park
NCR Non-conformance Report
NEC New Engineering Contract
OHSA Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1993
PBS Plant Breakdown Structure
PDF Adobe Portable Document Format
Pr Eng Professional Engineer registered in terms of the Engineering Profession Act, 2000
RDS-PP Reference Designation Systems for Power Plant (Wind Farm)
RFQ Request for Quote
RFT Request for Tender
SoW Scope of Work
TIC Technical Information Change
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
2.5 Related/supporting documents
2.5.1 Related Work Instructions
36-944 Latest General Standard Instruction for General Drawing Software Configuration
36-945 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for P&ID Drafting
36-946 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for Electrical Drafting
2.5.2 Superseded Standards
The following Eskom Standards are superseded by this document.
Document No. Title
167A/143 Drawing Office Practice
GGG 0450 Guideline to Acceptance of Contract Drawings
GGS 0182 Process Flow Diagrams and Piping Instrumentation Diagrams
GGS 0315 Standard Drawing Practice
GGS 0441 Drawing Records System
GSE/94/Y004 Standard Drawing Practice
36-943 Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation Standard
45-698 Engineering Computer Aided Design Drafting Standard
2.5.3 Consolidated Reference Standards
This document combined with the following standards and standard instructions:
Document Revision Title
No.
36-943 Latest Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation
Standard
3. General drawing standard
3.1 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to define the requirements that must be followed by Eskom drawing
office(s) and Contractor’s drawing office staff when producing drawings for Eskom. The section
specifically defines the procedures and standards for an electronic drawing office.
3.2 Scope
This section specifies the procedures and standards that must be adhered to while compiling and
distributing engineering drawings and associated engineering documentation.
General Drawings are seen as drawings of General Arrangement, Sectional Views and Detail Drawings
of the following:
Architectural
Civil
Structural
Mechanical
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Machining
Welding Instructions
Piping
Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC)
Electrical
Lighting & Small Power
Control and Instrumentation (C&I)
Text Tagging of existing drawings for data mining
Mapping GIS
3.3 Codification
See Coding Standard for respective divisional codification requirements.
3.4 Cad software requirement
Eskom standard CAD software to be used both internally and externally. (Microstation and SmartPlant
Enterprise)
3.5 Documentation
The requirements for specific drawing documents are specified in the following paragraphs.
All drawings produced by Eskom and/or any of its contractors shall adhere to South African law and
standards that are in force when the drawing is produced. This includes but is not limited to the use
of internal approved standards.
Drafting of General Drawings, including Text-Tagged Drawings shall be done in accordance with this
standard.
General Drawings shall be produced on the appropriate document size that will ensure legibility and
clarity of users on the contents of the drawings.
The following best practice shall be applied in the creation of drawings:
Drawings shall be properly planned and produced to ensure ease of interpretation and read-ability.
Typical details are not to be duplicated. Appropriate references shall be used in the main drawing to
indicate repetition of any typical details.
The use of unnecessary views shall be eliminated.
Application of a constant set of scales on sets of drawings.
Avoidance of odd scales, use the most common scales such as 1:1, 1:50, 1:20, 1:10, 1:2, 2:2
Provision of cross-reference information shall be provided on drawings, i.e. reference to other
drawings as well as to design information/manuals as appropriate.
Manufacturer’s information and datasheets shall be provided in a software format and version
specified by Eskom.
3.6 Classifcation of drawings
a) Drawings shall be classified according to the following information classification levels:
i. Class 1
Secret: Only for use within specified segments in the organization
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
ii. Class 2
Confidential: May not be disclosed outside of Eskom – represents a competitive advantage for
the business.
iii. Class 3
Controlled Disclosure: Internal Information – controlled disclosure to any external parties –
either enforced by law or discretionary
iv. Class 4
Public Domain/Non-classified: Published in any public forum without constraints, either enforced
by law or discretionary
b) This classification shall form part of the document record Meta data and user access to the
drawing(s) will be restricted accordingly.
3.7 Drawing change request
All Eskom drawing offices as well as Contractor’s drawings offices shall comply with the respective
Divisional Work Instructions. This shall be documented clearly and must comply with Eskom’s minimum
change control rules.
For drawing changes a request and scope of work is supplied by the customer to the CADD Office.
EPSS CADD Office Work Request form (240-85194150) will be completed in full and returned to
customer for approval of time and costs. The customer will sign acceptance and return to the CADD
office for commencement of work. On completion of work the draftsperson will send a copy to the
customer for checking and approval. Once all work is complete the customer will receive a signed copy
of the drawings and on receipt of these will sign off the original request form, that he received all work as
per original request. The draftsperson shall send the drawings for archiving and storage.
3.8 Drawing workflow
The issuing, updating and creating of drawings shall be done in accordance with the generic workflow as
per attached in (240-83904158) or to a specific Divisional requirement.
3.9 Request for drawings
Should any drawing be required by a Contractor or third party, the Eskom Non-Disclosure Confidentiality
Agreement form must be signed off by the Contractor or third party and sent to the designated Eskom
Drawing Office Document Controller prior to the drawing being issued?
3.10 Issuing of drawings/transmittals
During plant design and development, as well as operations and maintenance of a plant, it is expected
that numerous projects would be initiated for various purposes. These projects typically involve thirdparty contractors (EPCs, vendors, etc.), who work with and generate Eskom information. The exchange
of information between Eskom and third-parties is typically carried out through Transmittal events. These
Transmittals, as well as the associated drawings and documents, are captured in SmartPlant for Owner
Operators (SPO) either as Incoming Transmittals (information being submitted to Eskom by third-party
contractors), or as Outgoing Transmittals (information being submitted by Eskom to third-party
contractors).
In order to centralise the storage and dissemination of information submitted to Eskom as part of
transmittals, the business adopts a centralised collaboration platform where such information can be
managed effectively prior to loading to the relevant destination system (SPO, Hyperwave, etc.).
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Microsoft ® SharePointTM (“SharePoint”) will be leveraged to enhance Transmittal Management, by
providing a supplemental platform for receiving information submitted to Eskom through traditional
channels (hard-copy, CD/flash drives, email) as well as a new mechanism for direct upload of
information to Eskom. The information is required to be managed prior to loading into the relevant
destination system. SharePoint will also serve as an externally accessible platform to enhance the
security and traceability of data submission to third-party contractors once downloaded from the source
Eskom system, and to automate the submission of a download link to the third party contractor.
Generation Technology makes use of a SharePoint Transmittal Management system.
Acknowledgement of receipt will happen automatically within the SharePoint environment. See Doc
Number 240-110409882 and 240-110409934 for further details.
Third-party contractors’ will continue to submit files in hard copy or on removable media (e.g. CD) to
Eskom due to file sizes, network constraints, etc. that prevent the submission of information to Eskom
via email channels or through the new SharePoint site.
3.11 Issuing of new drawing numbers
a) Request for drawing number shall be requested in writing to the designated Eskom Document
controller. All drawing numbers will be centrally allocated for all plants and projects with a
designated document/drawing controller that will assign the drawing numbers.
b) Under no circumstance will the requester be allowed to change drawing titles or the drawing for a
purpose other than what was requested, without approval from Eskom allocated document
controllers.
3.12 Superseded or cancelled drawings
a) A superseded drawing is one that is no longer in use.
b) It is important to note that when a drawing has been registered and an identification number has
been allocated, this cannot be changed once it has been distributed or authorized. This changed
status of the document must be captured in the MRI (master Record Index) of drawings for the
relevant status, and if it is a controlled copy, the necessary notification that the drawing has been
cancelled or superseded must be issued as part of the process. All superseded drawings shall be
marked clearly ‘superseded by the new drawing number’. Conversely, a drawing which supersedes
another must clearly state the number of that drawing which it supersedes. A revision must be
added.
c) All superseded or cancelled drawings are to be retained in the archive system.
d) A superseded or cancelled drawing numbers shall never be used for any other created drawings.
These numbers will remain dormant.
e) If drawing number are allocated as a batch the requestor must provide Eskom with a Fully Detailed
MDL providing all the required meta-data needed to complete the drawing record in the SPO
system.
3.13 Drawing checking procedure
The following is a guideline to be followed to check all drawings:
a) Once the draftsperson has completed a drawing, a check print must be issued to the responsible
engineer or Chief Draftsperson. The check print must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
The responsible engineer or Chief Draftsperson must check the drawing against the relevant
marked up drawing. This should be done with the relevant stakeholders to ensure due process and
standards have been applied and the physical drawing content is acceptable. If the electronic
functionality like SPO “View and Mark-up” are used the same rules for mark/correction will apply.
Checks include:
i. With the codification officer to ensure that all tagged items comply with the site codification
system as required.
ii. The check by an alternate draftsperson is performed to ensure that the drawing standards are
adhered to and that all the marked-up items have been incorporated as required.
iii. A standard checklist for drawings APPENDIX B: DRAWING CHECKLIST shall be used as a
basis for checking that the drawing standards are adhered to.
iv. The checks done by the Drawing Office checkers, the data controllers and the responsible
engineer are to ensure that the design changes are incorporated as required.
v. Once the responsible engineer or draftsperson has completed checking a drawing, the check
print must be signed and dated and the full name of the checker must be recorded on the
drawing.
vi. The drawing must then be returned to the responsible draftsperson. All discrepancies or queries
must be clearly marked up utilizing the following colour code system, and reviewed with the
responsible draftsperson:
Red - Corrections or Add info
Yellow - Delete
Blue - Comments (will not be drafted)
Green - Correct
b) The draftsperson must back-draft the ‘CHECK PRINT’ drawing and reissue the drawing to the
responsible engineer or DO Supervisor as a revised ‘CHECK PRINT’ for rechecking. Once no more
discrepancies are marked up on the ‘CHECK PRINT’ by the responsible engineer or DO Supervisor
and he/she has signed off the drawing, the drawing is ready for issue to Eskom for the required
approval.
c) If required, the drawing must be issued to Eskom for checking in accordance with paragraph 3.11
d) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be issued together with a Transmittal Form
relating to the drawings. Issues that arise that Eskom must be resolve a NCRs must be created for
all drawings, capturing each and every issue that can be resolved.
e) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
f) A responsible engineer or draftsperson to check the drawing and resolve all the items listed on the
Ncr.
g) If required, the drawing must be issued to the Contractor drawing or responsible Drawing Office for
updating/back-drafting
h) Once a checked drawing is received, the responsible draftsperson will review any non-conformance
marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR with Eskom if required, and revise the drawing
accordingly.
i) The drawing must then be rechecked in accordance with this procedure.
[15] Once all the drawing’s non-conformances marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR have
been resolved by Eskom, the drawing will be reviewed, authorized and approved in accordance
with the applicable workflow stipulated in 240-83904158 - CADD Office Workflow Guideline.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.14 Nonconformance reporting
To be done according to Eskom Approved NCR process as outlined by ISO9001.
3.15 Electronic format of drawings issued to ESKOM
a) All drawings submitted to Eskom shall comply with Eskom Standard drawing applications version, at
that specific time.
b) All drawings must be issued to Eskom in both native CADD format and PDF/TIF format.
c) Drawings issued to Eskom may not be “Write Protected” or encrypted as Eskom has to do the
necessary configuration management on these documents upon receipt.
3.16 Registration of drawings
a) All drawings must be registered by Eskom on the Electronic Document Management System
(EDMS) See paragraph 6.1 Minimum Drawing Meta-data required. See Doc 240-58552870
b) Contractors shall maintain a Drawing Register which records at least the following information in line
with SPO/EDMS requirements:
Eskom Drawing Number.
Contractor Drawing Number
Eskom Change Request Number.
Drawing Title.
Filename.
Contractor Revision.
Eskom Revision.
c) The Contractor’s drawing register must be made available to Eskom for audit on request.
3.17 Revision control
The drawing revision shall be clearly identified by placing a Revision Triangle and Revision Letter or
Number, in the revised area(s) of the drawing. A brief but informative statement of the revision made,
and where applicable the appropriate change order, project or other reference code, shall be shown in
revision block. It is to be noted NO preceding “0” is required before revs 0-9. The system sequentially
counts for this.
3.17.1 Drawing and Revision Status
Rev 0 Rev 1 Rev 2
Iteration Action Document
Rev State Rev State Rev State
State
0 New Document is Reserved Working
1 Sign Off Document Issued Current
2 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Current Working
3 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Current
4 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Superceded Current Working
5 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Superceded Current
See Document 240-58552870
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.17.2 Drawing Status Stamps
The use of drawing “status stamps” a watermark, rubber stamp, or cell may be used. Only the following
list of stamps shall be used:
Preliminary
Issued for contruction
As built
Controlled copy
Superseded
Cancelled
Controlled Copy
Issued to:
Date of Issue:
Check print
The need arose to consolidate all Eskom Drawing Office Standards to improve and streamline
consistency in the Engineering Divisions.
SmartPlant is being deployed at Eskom to manage technical data and documents related to power
Generation plants.
Distribution and Transmission plants are not in scope for the current programme.
An engineering drawing, a type of technical drawing, is used to fully and clearly define requirements for
items to be engineered or manufactured.
Engineering drawing (the activity of drafting) produces engineering drawings. More than merely the
drawing of pictures, it is also a type of language, a graphical language that communicates ideas and
information from one mind to another. Most importantly, it communicates all needed information from the
engineer who designed a part to the people who will make it.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This document defines general rules and code of practices to be followed by all designers and drafters to
produce design drawings of consistent and professional quality. The accuracy and adequacy of the
design and drafting work and its compliance with the applicable standards remain the responsibility of
the designer or draftsperson. Nothing contained in this standard shall be construed as relieving the
designer or drafter of the individual responsibility for producing quality drawings.
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to define the standard and requirements that must be followed by all
internal Eskom Drawing offices(s) and Contractors, for production and control of all Eskom Drawings
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Soc Ltd – Generation, Plant Engineering and All
Eskom Contractors
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
2.2.2 Informative
[2] 240-83904158 – CADD Office Workflow Guideline
[3] 240-85194150 – EPSS CADD Office Work Request form
[4] 32-6 Eskom Documentation Management Procedure
[5] 36-1 Standard for Management Systems Document, Correspondence and Records
[6] 36-2 Writing and Controlling Management Systems Documents
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
[7] 240-109607662 Eskom Plant Labelling Abbreviation Standard
[8] 240-71432150 Plant Labelling Standard
[9] 240-73143217 Eskom RDS-PP Coding Standard
[10] 240-93576498 KKS Coding Standard
[11] 240-109607942 Eskom RDS-PP Key Part Standard
[12] 240-58552870 SmartPlant for Owner Operators (SPO) Document Metadata Standard
[13] 240-110409882 Functional Specification for SharePoint Portal in support of SPO Transmittal
Management
[14] 240-110409934 User Requirements Specification (URS) for a Collaboration Platform to
supplement SmartPlant
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
As Built Drawing Drawing which is verified as an exact representation of a plant or a section of
a plant that has been completely built.
Check Print Drawing which is printed and utilized for verification of a drawing during the
drawing checking procedure.
Contractor A party appointed by Eskom to render services.
Data Mining For the purposes of this standard Data Mining shall be the extraction of Text
Tagged data from Computer-aided Drafting (CAD) drawings.
Controlled Copy A copy of a document held by a documentation/satellite centre or by a
designated individual that has the guarantee that it is the latest and current
valid revision. This copy shall be clearly stamped in red ‘CONTROLLED
COPY’. All controlled documents that are printed will be considered valid for a
maximum period of 24 hours. Users shall always reference back to the EDMS
for the latest version of a document.
Deviation/Notification Process This process is the initiator of engineering activities to permanently address
plant deficiencies or incidents.
Draftsperson A person responsible for the creation and updating of drawings, in
accordance with this standard.
Functional Process Flow Diagram showing all or a recognizable portion of the process, complete with a
Diagram (FPFD) material and/or heat balance sheet. It contains details of operating
parameters such as flow rate, temperature and pressure.
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram which shows limited details of the mechanical and electrical
Diagram (P&ID) components, pipework and ducting, and identifies all the measuring points
and control elements that are necessary to measure and control that process.
Plant System A collection of plant components connected in such a way that each will
perform a unique process, thereby achieving specified performance
parameters.
Preliminary A drawing which is produced to convey ideas and proposals prior to approval
and which has not been accepted for construction. The approved Preliminary
drawings are used for the implementation on site, there after the as built
drawings will be marked up and updated.
Primary Process Flow Diagram Diagram which indicates the major process as well as the process values
(PPFD) through all or most of the main plant items of a given power station or system.
Project Configuration Files The customized set-up files that must be utilized in conjunction standard
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Definition Description
Eskom tools Piping and Instrumentation Diagram/Process and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID).
Secondary Process Flow Secondary process flow diagram is similar to the Primary Process Flow
Diagram (SPFD) Diagram (PPFD), except that it only deals with one particular system or
subsystem of plant, and in more detail.
Text Tagging For the purposes of this standard Text Tagging shall be the process of adding
electronic text tags into a CAD drawing for the purpose of data mining.
2.3.1 Disclosure Classification
Public Domain: Published in any public forum without constraints (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
AKZ Anlagen Kenn Zeichnungs System (Identification System for Power Stations)
BU Business Unit
CAD Computer Aided Drafting
DGN Bentley MicroStation Drawing File Extension
DWG/DXF- AutoCAD Drawing File Extensions
ECSA Engineering Council South Africa
EDMS Electronic Document Management System
EPSS Engineering Process & System Support
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IT Information Technology
KKS Kraftwerk Kennzeichen System (Identification System for Power Stations)
MDL Master Document List
MWP Megawatt Park
NCR Non-conformance Report
NEC New Engineering Contract
OHSA Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1993
PBS Plant Breakdown Structure
PDF Adobe Portable Document Format
Pr Eng Professional Engineer registered in terms of the Engineering Profession Act, 2000
RDS-PP Reference Designation Systems for Power Plant (Wind Farm)
RFQ Request for Quote
RFT Request for Tender
SoW Scope of Work
TIC Technical Information Change
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
2.5 Related/supporting documents
2.5.1 Related Work Instructions
36-944 Latest General Standard Instruction for General Drawing Software Configuration
36-945 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for P&ID Drafting
36-946 Latest Generation Standard Instruction for Electrical Drafting
2.5.2 Superseded Standards
The following Eskom Standards are superseded by this document.
Document No. Title
167A/143 Drawing Office Practice
GGG 0450 Guideline to Acceptance of Contract Drawings
GGS 0182 Process Flow Diagrams and Piping Instrumentation Diagrams
GGS 0315 Standard Drawing Practice
GGS 0441 Drawing Records System
GSE/94/Y004 Standard Drawing Practice
36-943 Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation Standard
45-698 Engineering Computer Aided Design Drafting Standard
2.5.3 Consolidated Reference Standards
This document combined with the following standards and standard instructions:
Document Revision Title
No.
36-943 Latest Generation Engineering Drawing Office and Engineering Documentation
Standard
3. General drawing standard
3.1 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to define the requirements that must be followed by Eskom drawing
office(s) and Contractor’s drawing office staff when producing drawings for Eskom. The section
specifically defines the procedures and standards for an electronic drawing office.
3.2 Scope
This section specifies the procedures and standards that must be adhered to while compiling and
distributing engineering drawings and associated engineering documentation.
General Drawings are seen as drawings of General Arrangement, Sectional Views and Detail Drawings
of the following:
Architectural
Civil
Structural
Mechanical
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Machining
Welding Instructions
Piping
Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC)
Electrical
Lighting & Small Power
Control and Instrumentation (C&I)
Text Tagging of existing drawings for data mining
Mapping GIS
3.3 Codification
See Coding Standard for respective divisional codification requirements.
3.4 Cad software requirement
Eskom standard CAD software to be used both internally and externally. (Microstation and SmartPlant
Enterprise)
3.5 Documentation
The requirements for specific drawing documents are specified in the following paragraphs.
All drawings produced by Eskom and/or any of its contractors shall adhere to South African law and
standards that are in force when the drawing is produced. This includes but is not limited to the use
of internal approved standards.
Drafting of General Drawings, including Text-Tagged Drawings shall be done in accordance with this
standard.
General Drawings shall be produced on the appropriate document size that will ensure legibility and
clarity of users on the contents of the drawings.
The following best practice shall be applied in the creation of drawings:
Drawings shall be properly planned and produced to ensure ease of interpretation and read-ability.
Typical details are not to be duplicated. Appropriate references shall be used in the main drawing to
indicate repetition of any typical details.
The use of unnecessary views shall be eliminated.
Application of a constant set of scales on sets of drawings.
Avoidance of odd scales, use the most common scales such as 1:1, 1:50, 1:20, 1:10, 1:2, 2:2
Provision of cross-reference information shall be provided on drawings, i.e. reference to other
drawings as well as to design information/manuals as appropriate.
Manufacturer’s information and datasheets shall be provided in a software format and version
specified by Eskom.
3.6 Classifcation of drawings
a) Drawings shall be classified according to the following information classification levels:
i. Class 1
Secret: Only for use within specified segments in the organization
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
ii. Class 2
Confidential: May not be disclosed outside of Eskom – represents a competitive advantage for
the business.
iii. Class 3
Controlled Disclosure: Internal Information – controlled disclosure to any external parties –
either enforced by law or discretionary
iv. Class 4
Public Domain/Non-classified: Published in any public forum without constraints, either enforced
by law or discretionary
b) This classification shall form part of the document record Meta data and user access to the
drawing(s) will be restricted accordingly.
3.7 Drawing change request
All Eskom drawing offices as well as Contractor’s drawings offices shall comply with the respective
Divisional Work Instructions. This shall be documented clearly and must comply with Eskom’s minimum
change control rules.
For drawing changes a request and scope of work is supplied by the customer to the CADD Office.
EPSS CADD Office Work Request form (240-85194150) will be completed in full and returned to
customer for approval of time and costs. The customer will sign acceptance and return to the CADD
office for commencement of work. On completion of work the draftsperson will send a copy to the
customer for checking and approval. Once all work is complete the customer will receive a signed copy
of the drawings and on receipt of these will sign off the original request form, that he received all work as
per original request. The draftsperson shall send the drawings for archiving and storage.
3.8 Drawing workflow
The issuing, updating and creating of drawings shall be done in accordance with the generic workflow as
per attached in (240-83904158) or to a specific Divisional requirement.
3.9 Request for drawings
Should any drawing be required by a Contractor or third party, the Eskom Non-Disclosure Confidentiality
Agreement form must be signed off by the Contractor or third party and sent to the designated Eskom
Drawing Office Document Controller prior to the drawing being issued?
3.10 Issuing of drawings/transmittals
During plant design and development, as well as operations and maintenance of a plant, it is expected
that numerous projects would be initiated for various purposes. These projects typically involve thirdparty contractors (EPCs, vendors, etc.), who work with and generate Eskom information. The exchange
of information between Eskom and third-parties is typically carried out through Transmittal events. These
Transmittals, as well as the associated drawings and documents, are captured in SmartPlant for Owner
Operators (SPO) either as Incoming Transmittals (information being submitted to Eskom by third-party
contractors), or as Outgoing Transmittals (information being submitted by Eskom to third-party
contractors).
In order to centralise the storage and dissemination of information submitted to Eskom as part of
transmittals, the business adopts a centralised collaboration platform where such information can be
managed effectively prior to loading to the relevant destination system (SPO, Hyperwave, etc.).
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
Microsoft ® SharePointTM (“SharePoint”) will be leveraged to enhance Transmittal Management, by
providing a supplemental platform for receiving information submitted to Eskom through traditional
channels (hard-copy, CD/flash drives, email) as well as a new mechanism for direct upload of
information to Eskom. The information is required to be managed prior to loading into the relevant
destination system. SharePoint will also serve as an externally accessible platform to enhance the
security and traceability of data submission to third-party contractors once downloaded from the source
Eskom system, and to automate the submission of a download link to the third party contractor.
Generation Technology makes use of a SharePoint Transmittal Management system.
Acknowledgement of receipt will happen automatically within the SharePoint environment. See Doc
Number 240-110409882 and 240-110409934 for further details.
Third-party contractors’ will continue to submit files in hard copy or on removable media (e.g. CD) to
Eskom due to file sizes, network constraints, etc. that prevent the submission of information to Eskom
via email channels or through the new SharePoint site.
3.11 Issuing of new drawing numbers
a) Request for drawing number shall be requested in writing to the designated Eskom Document
controller. All drawing numbers will be centrally allocated for all plants and projects with a
designated document/drawing controller that will assign the drawing numbers.
b) Under no circumstance will the requester be allowed to change drawing titles or the drawing for a
purpose other than what was requested, without approval from Eskom allocated document
controllers.
3.12 Superseded or cancelled drawings
a) A superseded drawing is one that is no longer in use.
b) It is important to note that when a drawing has been registered and an identification number has
been allocated, this cannot be changed once it has been distributed or authorized. This changed
status of the document must be captured in the MRI (master Record Index) of drawings for the
relevant status, and if it is a controlled copy, the necessary notification that the drawing has been
cancelled or superseded must be issued as part of the process. All superseded drawings shall be
marked clearly ‘superseded by the new drawing number’. Conversely, a drawing which supersedes
another must clearly state the number of that drawing which it supersedes. A revision must be
added.
c) All superseded or cancelled drawings are to be retained in the archive system.
d) A superseded or cancelled drawing numbers shall never be used for any other created drawings.
These numbers will remain dormant.
e) If drawing number are allocated as a batch the requestor must provide Eskom with a Fully Detailed
MDL providing all the required meta-data needed to complete the drawing record in the SPO
system.
3.13 Drawing checking procedure
The following is a guideline to be followed to check all drawings:
a) Once the draftsperson has completed a drawing, a check print must be issued to the responsible
engineer or Chief Draftsperson. The check print must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
The responsible engineer or Chief Draftsperson must check the drawing against the relevant
marked up drawing. This should be done with the relevant stakeholders to ensure due process and
standards have been applied and the physical drawing content is acceptable. If the electronic
functionality like SPO “View and Mark-up” are used the same rules for mark/correction will apply.
Checks include:
i. With the codification officer to ensure that all tagged items comply with the site codification
system as required.
ii. The check by an alternate draftsperson is performed to ensure that the drawing standards are
adhered to and that all the marked-up items have been incorporated as required.
iii. A standard checklist for drawings APPENDIX B: DRAWING CHECKLIST shall be used as a
basis for checking that the drawing standards are adhered to.
iv. The checks done by the Drawing Office checkers, the data controllers and the responsible
engineer are to ensure that the design changes are incorporated as required.
v. Once the responsible engineer or draftsperson has completed checking a drawing, the check
print must be signed and dated and the full name of the checker must be recorded on the
drawing.
vi. The drawing must then be returned to the responsible draftsperson. All discrepancies or queries
must be clearly marked up utilizing the following colour code system, and reviewed with the
responsible draftsperson:
Red - Corrections or Add info
Yellow - Delete
Blue - Comments (will not be drafted)
Green - Correct
b) The draftsperson must back-draft the ‘CHECK PRINT’ drawing and reissue the drawing to the
responsible engineer or DO Supervisor as a revised ‘CHECK PRINT’ for rechecking. Once no more
discrepancies are marked up on the ‘CHECK PRINT’ by the responsible engineer or DO Supervisor
and he/she has signed off the drawing, the drawing is ready for issue to Eskom for the required
approval.
c) If required, the drawing must be issued to Eskom for checking in accordance with paragraph 3.11
d) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be issued together with a Transmittal Form
relating to the drawings. Issues that arise that Eskom must be resolve a NCRs must be created for
all drawings, capturing each and every issue that can be resolved.
e) Each drawing issued to Eskom for checking must be clearly stamped ‘CHECK PRINT’.
f) A responsible engineer or draftsperson to check the drawing and resolve all the items listed on the
Ncr.
g) If required, the drawing must be issued to the Contractor drawing or responsible Drawing Office for
updating/back-drafting
h) Once a checked drawing is received, the responsible draftsperson will review any non-conformance
marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR with Eskom if required, and revise the drawing
accordingly.
i) The drawing must then be rechecked in accordance with this procedure.
[15] Once all the drawing’s non-conformances marked up on the drawing or recorded on the NCR have
been resolved by Eskom, the drawing will be reviewed, authorized and approved in accordance
with the applicable workflow stipulated in 240-83904158 - CADD Office Workflow Guideline.
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.14 Nonconformance reporting
To be done according to Eskom Approved NCR process as outlined by ISO9001.
3.15 Electronic format of drawings issued to ESKOM
a) All drawings submitted to Eskom shall comply with Eskom Standard drawing applications version, at
that specific time.
b) All drawings must be issued to Eskom in both native CADD format and PDF/TIF format.
c) Drawings issued to Eskom may not be “Write Protected” or encrypted as Eskom has to do the
necessary configuration management on these documents upon receipt.
3.16 Registration of drawings
a) All drawings must be registered by Eskom on the Electronic Document Management System
(EDMS) See paragraph 6.1 Minimum Drawing Meta-data required. See Doc 240-58552870
b) Contractors shall maintain a Drawing Register which records at least the following information in line
with SPO/EDMS requirements:
Eskom Drawing Number.
Contractor Drawing Number
Eskom Change Request Number.
Drawing Title.
Filename.
Contractor Revision.
Eskom Revision.
c) The Contractor’s drawing register must be made available to Eskom for audit on request.
3.17 Revision control
The drawing revision shall be clearly identified by placing a Revision Triangle and Revision Letter or
Number, in the revised area(s) of the drawing. A brief but informative statement of the revision made,
and where applicable the appropriate change order, project or other reference code, shall be shown in
revision block. It is to be noted NO preceding “0” is required before revs 0-9. The system sequentially
counts for this.
3.17.1 Drawing and Revision Status
Rev 0 Rev 1 Rev 2
Iteration Action Document
Rev State Rev State Rev State
State
0 New Document is Reserved Working
1 Sign Off Document Issued Current
2 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Current Working
3 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Current
4 Revise Document ISSUED_WKG Superceded Current Working
5 Sign Off Document Issued Superceded Superceded Current
See Document 240-58552870
Public domain
When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line
with the authorised version on the system.
Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501
Revision: 3
Page:
3.17.2 Drawing Status Stamps
The use of drawing “status stamps” a watermark, rubber stamp, or cell may be used. Only the following
list of stamps shall be used:
Preliminary
Issued for contruction
As built
Controlled copy
Superseded
Cancelled
Controlled Copy
Issued to:
Date of Issue:
Check print
Cell B2: Submit a letter of compliance to all Scope of Work with no exclusions.
supply Tenderer, of Criteria,
as Evaluation 11 the listed of for mandatory scope366-552799 0 3 qualifying Evaluation serves Mandatory process both best The meet documents the the strategy Identifier: to Project
Compliance Requirements
Source: Annexure L - Scope of Work and Technical Evaluation Criteria.zip (unknown)No specific requirements found
Insufficient searchable text - AI extraction recommended
Alternative Reference Number: N/A Area of Applicability: Gx and Plant Engineering Documentation Type: Standard Revision: 3 Total Pages: 31 Next Review Date: August 2022 Disclosure Classification: PUBLIC DOMAIN Compiled by Approved by Authorised by ......................................... ......................................... ......................................... J.H. Herndler M. Gabonewe L. Fernandez CADD Office Manager EPSS Manager Senior Manager Date: ................................. Date: ................................. Date: ................................. Supported by SCOT SC .........................................
Mokoena SCOT SC Chairperson Date: ................................. PCM Reference : 240-44509543 Design System SCOT Study Committee Number/Name : Data and Configuration Management SC Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501 Revision: 3 Page: CONTENTS . INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
SUPPORTING CLAUSES ........................................................................................................................................ 4 2.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................................................. 4 2.1.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 2.1.2 Applicability................................................................................................................................................ 4 2.2 NORMATIVE/INFORMATIVE REFERENCES .................................................................................................. 4 2.2.1 Normative .................................................................................................................................................. 4 2.2.2 Informative ................................................................................................................................................. 4 2.3 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................... 5 2.3.1 Disclosure Classification ........................................................................................................................... 6 2.4 ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 6 2.5 RELATED/SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................................... 7 2.5.1 Related Work Instructions ......................................................................................................................... 7 2.5.2 Superseded Standards .............................................................................................................................. 7 2.5.3 Consolidated Reference Standards .......................................................................................................... 7
GENERAL DRAWING STANDARD ........................................................................................................................ 7 3.1 PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 3.3 CODIFICATION ................................................................................................................................................. 8 3.4 CAD SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT .................................................................................................................. 8 3.5 DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................................................................................... 8 3.6 CLASSIFCATION OF DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 8 3.7 DRAWING CHANGE REQUEST ...................................................................................................................... 9 3.8 DRAWING WORKFLOW ................................................................................................................................... 9 3.9 REQUEST FOR DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................ 9 3.10 ISSUING OF DRAWINGS/TRANSMITTALS .................................................................................................. 9 3.11 ISSUING OF NEW DRAWING NUMBERS ................................................................................................... 10 3.12 SUPERSEDED OR CANCELLED DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 10 3.13 DRAWING CHECKING PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................... 10 3.14 NONCONFORMANCE REPORTING ........................................................................................................... 12 3.15 ELECTRONIC FORMAT OF DRAWINGS ISSUED TO ESKOM .................................................................. 12 3.16 REGISTRATION OF DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................. 12 3.17 REVISION CONTROL ................................................................................................................................... 12 3.17.1 Drawing and Revision Status ................................................................................................................ 12 3.17.2 Drawing Status Stamps ......................................................................................................................... 13 3.17.3 Revision Information which is to be recorded in the Eskom Section of the Title Block......................... 13 3.17.4 Revision Information which is to be recorded in the Contractor Section of the Title Block ................... 14 3.18 CONTRACTOR INFORMATION BACKUP ................................................................................................... 14 3.19 STANDARD SEED FILES ............................................................................................................................. 14 3.19.1 Layer, Colours and Line Weights .......................................................................................................... 14 3.19.2 Standard Text ........................................................................................................................................ 14 3.19.3 Standard Dimension Style ..................................................................................................................... 15 3.19.4 Abbreviations ......................................................................................................................................... 15 3.19.5 Projections ............................................................................................................................................. 16 3.19.6 Section and detail labelling .................................................................................................................... 16 3.19.7 Titling of Drawings ................................................................................................................................. 16 3.19.8 Scan Resolution .................................................................................................................................... 16
STANDARD DRAWING SHEETS AND TITLE BLOCKS ..................................................................................... 16 4.1 USE OF MULTIPLE SHEETS ......................................................................................................................... 16 4.2 ESKOM STANDARD TITLE BLOCK ............................................................................................................... 17 4.3 CONTRACTORS TITLE BLOCK ..................................................................................................................... 17 PUBLIC DOMAIN When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system. Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501 Revision: 3 Page: 4.4 DESCRIPTION FOR COMPLETING TITLE BLOCK ...................................................................................... 18
Paper sizes ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
ARCHIVING AND RECORDS STORAGE OF DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................................................................................................................... 20 6.1 META DATA REQUIRED ................................................................................................................................ 21 6.1.1 Drawing Meta Data .................................................................................................................................. 21
Authorisation .................................................................................................................................................. 22
Revisions ............................................................................................................................................................ 23
Development team ......................................................................................................................................... 23
Acknowledgements .................................................................................................................................... 24
Appendix a: standard layers ................................................................................................................ 25
APPENDIX B: DRAWING CHECKLIST ............................................................................................................ 30 FIGURES Figure 1: Standard Title Block .................................................................................................................................... 17 Figure 2: Contractors Title Block ................................................................................................................................ 17 TABLES Table 1: Text Style Settings for A4 and A3 Drawings ................................................................................................ 14 Table 2: Text Style Settings for A2, A1 and A0 Drawings .......................................................................................... 15 Table 3: Description detail for Title Block ................................................................................................................... 18 Table 4: Sheets Sizes ................................................................................................................................................. 20 Table 5: Drawing Meta Data ....................................................................................................................................... 21 PUBLIC DOMAIN When downloaded from the EDMS, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system. Engineering Drawing Standard Common Requirements Unique Identifier: 240-86973501 Revision: 3 Page
B-BBEE Minimum Level: 3
Section
Source: Annexure L - Scope of Work and Technical Evaluation Criteria.zipfunctionality like SPO “View and Mark-up” are used the same rules for mark/correction will apply.
produce design drawings of consistent and professional quality. The accuracy and adequacy of the
designer or drafter of the individual responsibility for producing quality drawings.
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
[12] 240-58552870 SmartPlant for Owner Operators (SPO) Document Metadata Standard
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure P - Quality.zip (unknown)SECTION A (TENDERER) ENQUIRY/ CONTRACT No: E3064GCDMWP E3064GCDMWP E3064GCDMWP E3064GCDMWP E3064GCDMWP E3064GCDMWP E3064GCDMWP
SECTION A (TENDERER) ENQUIRY/ CONTRACT DESCRIPTION Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Project. Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Project. Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Project. Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Project. Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Project. Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Project. Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Project.
Clauses of 240-105658000 specification clause description clause description clause description clause description clause description clause description indicate with an (x) as applicable or (-) if not applicable
Section b (ESKOM) clause 3 pre-contract award quality requirements pre-contract award quality requirements pre-contract award quality requirements pre-contract award quality requirements pre-contract award quality requirements pre-contract award quality requirements x
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 4 (Select Only Applicable Category). NB: Not more than one category must be selected. Also indicate whether site assessment is applicable. (Select Only Applicable Category). NB: Not more than one category must be selected. Also indicate whether site assessment is applicable. (Select Only Applicable Category). NB: Not more than one category must be selected. Also indicate whether site assessment is applicable. (Select Only Applicable Category). NB: Not more than one category must be selected. Also indicate whether site assessment is applicable. (Select Only Applicable Category). NB: Not more than one category must be selected. Also indicate whether site assessment is applicable. (Select Only Applicable Category). NB: Not more than one category must be selected. Also indicate whether site assessment is applicable.
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 4 Category 1 (refer to clause 3.5.2 of 240-105658000) Category 1 (refer to clause 3.5.2 of 240-105658000) Category 1 (refer to clause 3.5.2 of 240-105658000) Category 1 (refer to clause 3.5.2 of 240-105658000) Category 1 (refer to clause 3.5.2 of 240-105658000) Category 1 (refer to clause 3.5.2 of 240-105658000) -
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 4 Category 2 (refer to clause 3.5.3 of 240-105658000) Category 2 (refer to clause 3.5.3 of 240-105658000) Category 2 (refer to clause 3.5.3 of 240-105658000) Category 2 (refer to clause 3.5.3 of 240-105658000) Category 2 (refer to clause 3.5.3 of 240-105658000) Category 2 (refer to clause 3.5.3 of 240-105658000) -
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 4 Category 3 (refer to clause 3.5.4 of 240-105658000) Category 3 (refer to clause 3.5.4 of 240-105658000) Category 3 (refer to clause 3.5.4 of 240-105658000) Category 3 (refer to clause 3.5.4 of 240-105658000) Category 3 (refer to clause 3.5.4 of 240-105658000) Category 3 (refer to clause 3.5.4 of 240-105658000) -
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 4 Category 4 (refer to clause 3.5.5 of 240-105658000) Category 4 (refer to clause 3.5.5 of 240-105658000) Category 4 (refer to clause 3.5.5 of 240-105658000) Category 4 (refer to clause 3.5.5 of 240-105658000) Category 4 (refer to clause 3.5.5 of 240-105658000) Category 4 (refer to clause 3.5.5 of 240-105658000) X
SECTION B (ESKOM) Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment (refer to clause 3.6 of 240-105658000) Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment (refer to clause 3.6 of 240-105658000) Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment (refer to clause 3.6 of 240-105658000) Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment (refer to clause 3.6 of 240-105658000) Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment (refer to clause 3.6 of 240-105658000) Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment (refer to clause 3.6 of 240-105658000) -
Section b (ESKOM) clause 5 post-contract award post-contract award post-contract award post-contract award post-contract award post-contract award
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 5 Contract Execution (refer to clause 3.7.1 of 240-105658000) Contract Execution (refer to clause 3.7.1 of 240-105658000) Contract Execution (refer to clause 3.7.1 of 240-105658000) Contract Execution (refer to clause 3.7.1 of 240-105658000) Contract Execution (refer to clause 3.7.1 of 240-105658000) Contract Execution (refer to clause 3.7.1 of 240-105658000) X
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 5 Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase (refer to clause 3.7.2 of 240-105658000) Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase (refer to clause 3.7.2 of 240-105658000) Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase (refer to clause 3.7.2 of 240-105658000) Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase (refer to clause 3.7.2 of 240-105658000) Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase (refer to clause 3.7.2 of 240-105658000) Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase (refer to clause 3.7.2 of 240-105658000) X
Section b (ESKOM) clause 6 standard conditions standard conditions standard conditions standard conditions standard conditions standard conditions
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 6 Eskom Rights of Access (refer to clause 3.8.1 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights of Access (refer to clause 3.8.1 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights of Access (refer to clause 3.8.1 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights of Access (refer to clause 3.8.1 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights of Access (refer to clause 3.8.1 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights of Access (refer to clause 3.8.1 of 240-105658000) X
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 6 Eskom Rights to Information (refer to clause 3.8.2 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights to Information (refer to clause 3.8.2 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights to Information (refer to clause 3.8.2 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights to Information (refer to clause 3.8.2 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights to Information (refer to clause 3.8.2 of 240-105658000) Eskom Rights to Information (refer to clause 3.8.2 of 240-105658000) X
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 6 Preservation (refer to clause 3.8.3 of 240-105658000) Preservation (refer to clause 3.8.3 of 240-105658000) Preservation (refer to clause 3.8.3 of 240-105658000) Preservation (refer to clause 3.8.3 of 240-105658000) Preservation (refer to clause 3.8.3 of 240-105658000) Preservation (refer to clause 3.8.3 of 240-105658000) X
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 6 Quality Audits Related Conditions (refer to clause 3.8.4 of 240-105658000) Quality Audits Related Conditions (refer to clause 3.8.4 of 240-105658000) Quality Audits Related Conditions (refer to clause 3.8.4 of 240-105658000) Quality Audits Related Conditions (refer to clause 3.8.4 of 240-105658000) Quality Audits Related Conditions (refer to clause 3.8.4 of 240-105658000) Quality Audits Related Conditions (refer to clause 3.8.4 of 240-105658000) X
SECTION B (ESKOM) CLAUSE 6 Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by Eskom (refer to clause 3.8.5 of 240-105658000) Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by Eskom (refer to clause 3.8.5 of 240-105658000) Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by Eskom (refer to clause 3.8.5 of 240-105658000) Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by Eskom (refer to clause 3.8.5 of 240-105658000) Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by Eskom (refer to clause 3.8.5 of 240-105658000) Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by Eskom (refer to clause 3.8.5 of 240-105658000) X
Section b (ESKOM) clause 6 special processes (refer to clause 3.8.6 Of 240-105658000) special processes (refer to clause 3.8.6 Of 240-105658000) special processes (refer to clause 3.8.6 Of 240-105658000) special processes (refer to clause 3.8.6 Of 240-105658000) special processes (refer to clause 3.8.6 Of 240-105658000) special processes (refer to clause 3.8.6 Of 240-105658000) x
Clauses of iso 9001 standard iso 9001 standard clause description indicate with an (x) as applicable or (-) if not applicable indicate with an (x) as applicable or (-) if not applicable quality principles iso 9001 standard principle description iso 9001 standard principle description indicate with an (x) as applicable or (-) if not applicable
SECTION C (ESKOM) CLAUSE 4 Context of the Organisation X X PRINCIPLE 1 Customer focus Customer focus X
SECTION C (ESKOM) CLAUSE 5 Leadership X X PRINCIPLE 2 Leadership Leadership X
SECTION C (ESKOM) CLAUSE 6 Planning X X PRINCIPLE 3 Engagement of people Engagement of people X
SECTION C (ESKOM) CLAUSE 7 Support X X PRINCIPLE 4 Process approach Process approach X
SECTION C (ESKOM) CLAUSE 8 Operation X X PRINCIPLE 5 Improvement Improvement X
SECTION C (ESKOM) CLAUSE 9 Performance Evaluations X X PRINCIPLE 6 Evidence based decision making Evidence based decision making X
SECTION C (ESKOM) CLAUSE 10 Improvement X X PRINCIPLE 7 Relationship Management Relationship Management X
Section d (ESKOM) eskom’s quality representative name name designation designation designation date signature
Section d (ESKOM) eskom’s quality representative
Section e (tenderer) tenderer’s quality representative name name designation designation designation date signature
Section e (tenderer) tenderer’s quality representative
File name: 240-68099512 (Rev 9) Form A Cat 4 Tender & Contract Quality Requirements for 240-105658000 and Quality Requirements for ISO 9001 Standard
Description
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zipThe Purchaser, identified in the Acceptance page signature block on the next page, has solicited offers to enter into a contract for the procurement of:
provided in
the scope of
work.
1.2 Tenderer 30% Pump and
submits motor
datasheets datasheet
for the pump
with
motor
information in
accordance
provided in
the scope of
work
Tenderers who do not meet the 70% threshold for functionality
scoring will be disqualified.
3.15 Evaluation of Price Prices will be evaluated as follows:
1. Inclusive of VAT;
2. Corrected for arithmetical errors;
3. Excluding contingencies in any bill of quantities or activity
schedule’
4. Adjusted for any other acceptable variations, deviations, or
alternative tenders submitted; and
5. Making a comparison of the Net Present Value of each adjusted
tender based on the tendered programme (if provided) and
prices, on the estimated effect of Price Adjustment Factors and
rate of exchange fluctuations (if applicable) and on other
evaluation parameters relating to uncertainty and risk, where
applicable.
6. Unconditional discounts will be taken into account for evaluation
purposes.
Controlled Disclosure
Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected]
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with
the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom
Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
of 61
File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 240-114238630 Rev 28
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date 07 April 2026
Review Date April 2031
Clause Number from Standard
Tender Data
Conditions of Tender
7. Conditional discounts will not be taken into account for
evaluation purposes but will be implemented when payment is
effected.
Prices will be scored out of 80 points.
3.18 Evaluation of Specific Specific goals will be scored out of 20 points in accordance with the
Goals PPPFA.
B-BBEE Status Level of Number of points (80/20
Contributor system)
1 20
2 18
3 14
4 12
5 8
6 6
7 4
8 2
Non-compliant contributor 0
If a tenderer fails to submit evidence of its points claim for a
Specific Goal, it will not be disqualified. However, it will be
awarded 0 points for that Specific Goal.
3.19 Ranking of tenders Tenderers will be ranked by applying the preferential point scoring for
the 80/20 system. Eskom will add the score from Pricing and Specific
Goals together and rank the suppliers from the highest to the lowest.
3.20 Objective Criteria Objective criteria are applicable.
(if applicable)
The following objective criteria apply to the tender:
The Objective Criteria applicable is compliance with the Designated
Sector requirements for Local Production and Content, as the scope
of work contains designated products/goods, material, components
and parts with stipulated minimum thresholds for Local Production
and Content that must be complied with before the Contract is
awarded, or the Tenderer should obtain an exemption from the
Department of Trade, Industry and Competition.
Designated Component:
Commodity Components: Pumps
Local Content Threshold: 70%
Evaluation methodology provided by SDL&I:
Tenderers will be evaluated based on compliance with the
required Local Production and Content threshold and
submission of the following documents:
Controlled Disclosure
Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected]
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with
the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom
Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
of 61
File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 240-114238630 Rev 28
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date 07 April 2026
Review Date April 2031
Clause Number from Standard
Tender Data
Conditions of Tender
Schedule to Annexure C
to Annexure C.
Please note that Eskom may award the contract to a tenderer
other than the highest scoring if objective criteria justify the
award.
3.21 Reverse e-auction Reverse e-auction is not applicable.
(if applicable)
Contractual Requirements
Additional Contractual Requirements includes the following
The following method will be followed when evaluating bids:
Important Dates
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip (TENDER){"closingDate":"07 April 2026","closingTime":"10h00","briefingSession":"{\"date\":\"29 June 2026\",\"time\":\"10h\",\"venue\":\"ion A non-compulsory clarification meeting with representatives of\",\"is_compulsory\":true}"}
Contact Information
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip (TENDER){"name":null,"email":"[email protected]","phone":"011 800 6534","department":null,"address":"r which"}
Submission Guidelines
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip (TENDER)Returnable Documents: 1 Submit a letter 366-541798 The Contractor of compliance De-grit is responsible to to all Scope of Sump complete the full Work with no Pumps scope of work exclusions. Scope of Work Rev.0 A Threshold of 70% is required to be met in order to be deemed technically acceptable. A tenderer that does not submit mandatory documents by or the complete information required in mandatory documents by the deadlines as stipulated in the Tender Returnable section of the respective Invitation to Tender will be deemed non-responsive. 3.13 Functionality requirements Functionality requirements are applicable. The following criteria will be applicable for this transaction under functionality criteria: A Threshold of 70% is required to be met in order to be deemed technically acceptable. Functionality requirements No. Qualitative Weighting Sub- Reference to Technical Weighti Technical ng Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031 Clause Number from Standard Tender Data Conditions of Tender Criteria Specification / Description Tender 1 LPS 100% 1.1 Tenderer 70% Pump submits datasheet datasheets and pump and pump curve curve for pump to be supplied in accordance
Evaluation Criteria
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip (TENDER)1.1.18 Quality Annexure P Y
1.1.20 Tax Evaluation questionnaire to determine whether a Annexure R Y
A Threshold of 70% is required to be met in order to be deemed
3.13 Functionality requirements Functionality requirements are applicable.
functionality criteria
Functionality requirements
1.1 Tenderer 70% Pump
Tenderers who do not meet the 70% threshold for functionality
3.15 Evaluation of Price Prices will be evaluated as follows
evaluation purposes but will be implemented when payment is
Prices will be scored out of 80 points.
3.18 Evaluation of Specific Specific goals will be scored out of 20 points in accordance with the
Goals PPPFA.
B-BBEE Status Level of Number of points (80/20
If a tenderer fails to submit evidence of its points claim for a
awarded 0 points for that Specific Goal.
the 80/20 system. Eskom will add the score from Pricing and Specific
Local Content Threshold: 70%
Evaluation methodology provided by SDL&I
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip (TENDER)The Purchaser, identified in the Acceptance page signature block on the next page, has solicited offers to enter into a contract for the procurement of:
provided in
the scope of
work.
1.2 Tenderer 30% Pump and
submits motor
datasheets datasheet
for the pump
with
motor
information in
accordance
provided in
the scope of
work
Tenderers who do not meet the 70% threshold for functionality
scoring will be disqualified.
3.15 Evaluation of Price Prices will be evaluated as follows:
1. Inclusive of VAT;
2. Corrected for arithmetical errors;
3. Excluding contingencies in any bill of quantities or activity
schedule’
4. Adjusted for any other acceptable variations, deviations, or
alternative tenders submitted; and
5. Making a comparison of the Net Present Value of each adjusted
tender based on the tendered programme (if provided) and
prices, on the estimated effect of Price Adjustment Factors and
rate of exchange fluctuations (if applicable) and on other
evaluation parameters relating to uncertainty and risk, where
applicable.
6. Unconditional discounts will be taken into account for evaluation
purposes.
Controlled Disclosure
Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected]
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with
the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom
Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
of 61
File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 240-114238630 Rev 28
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date 07 April 2026
Review Date April 2031
Clause Number from Standard
Tender Data
Conditions of Tender
7. Conditional discounts will not be taken into account for
evaluation purposes but will be implemented when payment is
effected.
Prices will be scored out of 80 points.
3.18 Evaluation of Specific Specific goals will be scored out of 20 points in accordance with the
Goals PPPFA.
B-BBEE Status Level of Number of points (80/20
Contributor system)
1 20
2 18
3 14
4 12
5 8
6 6
7 4
8 2
Non-compliant contributor 0
If a tenderer fails to submit evidence of its points claim for a
Specific Goal, it will not be disqualified. However, it will be
awarded 0 points for that Specific Goal.
3.19 Ranking of tenders Tenderers will be ranked by applying the preferential point scoring for
the 80/20 system. Eskom will add the score from Pricing and Specific
Goals together and rank the suppliers from the highest to the lowest.
3.20 Objective Criteria Objective criteria are applicable.
(if applicable)
The following objective criteria apply to the tender:
The Objective Criteria applicable is compliance with the Designated
Sector requirements for Local Production and Content, as the scope
of work contains designated products/goods, material, components
and parts with stipulated minimum thresholds for Local Production
and Content that must be complied with before the Contract is
awarded, or the Tenderer should obtain an exemption from the
Department of Trade, Industry and Competition.
Designated Component:
Commodity Components: Pumps
Local Content Threshold: 70%
Evaluation methodology provided by SDL&I:
Tenderers will be evaluated based on compliance with the
required Local Production and Content threshold and
submission of the following documents:
Controlled Disclosure
Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected]
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with
the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom
Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
of 61
File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 240-114238630 Rev 28
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date 07 April 2026
Review Date April 2031
Clause Number from Standard
Tender Data
Conditions of Tender
Schedule to Annexure C
to Annexure C.
Please note that Eskom may award the contract to a tenderer
other than the highest scoring if objective criteria justify the
award.
3.21 Reverse e-auction Reverse e-auction is not applicable.
(if applicable)
Contractual Requirements
Additional Contractual Requirements includes the following
The following method will be followed when evaluating bids:
Financial Requirements
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip (TENDER)Payment Terms: payment terms as stipulated hereunder
when submitting tenders and concluding contracts with Eskom:
For contracts valued below R50 000 000 (Fifty Million Rand) including VAT, Eskom is committed to
paying Suppliers within 30 days of receipt of undisputed invoices.
For contracts valued above R50 000 000 (Fifty Million Rand) including VAT, Eskom is committed
Compliance Requirements
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip (TENDER)ADDITIONAL CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS SUPPORTING EVIDENCE Annexure O - Health and Safety are Applicable. √ Safety COIDA - Original certificate of good standing or proof of application issued by the Compensation Fund (COID) or a licensed compensation insurer (South African tenderers only) Annexure P – Quality requirements are Applicable. √ Quality Other safety/quality Not Applicable documents as required per scope of works Environmental Not Applicable Not Applicable Due
A signed copy of the public interest score (only applicable to South African entities that are not audited) o Giving the actual score o Indicating whether the company is owner managed or not o Confirming whether the annual financial statements were externally prepared or not.
Copies of the ITA34C for the current & previous years of assessment (only applicable to South African entities that are not audited)
For unincorporated JV or a SPV, each partner in the JV or a SPV must submit its annual financial statements including all items listed above. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED UNDER FUNCTIONALITY/TECHINICAL CRITERIA Annexure Functionality requirements are applicable. √ Functionality/Technical Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031 ANNEXURE A AUTHORISATION FORM Indicate the status of the tenderer by ticking the appropriate box below. A B C D E F COMPANY CLOSE PARTNERSHIP JOINT SOLE TRUST CORPORATION VENTURE PROPRIETOR The tenderer must complete the appropriate certificate set out below for its category of organisation. If the tenderer is a company, close corporation, joint venture, or trust the tenderer must attach a certified copy the document that is proof of the contents of the certificate (resolution of the board of directors of a company, members’ resolution of a close corporation, power of attorney in the case of a joint venture, or resolution of the board of trustees of a trust). Note further that, in addition to completing the relevant certificate for category of organisation, the authorised representative of the tenderer is also required to complete and sign the table at the end of this Authorisation Form.
Certificate for company I,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _._ _ _ , in my capacity as _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the board of directors of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, hereby confirm that by resolution of the board taken on _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ (date), Mr/Ms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , acting in his/her capacity of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, is authorised to submit this tender on behalf of the company, and to sign all documents in connection with this tender and any contract that may result from it on behalf of the company. A certified copy of the resolution of the board is annexed to this Form. Signed: Date: Name: Position: Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031
Certificate for close corporation I,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _._ _ _ , in my capacity as member of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, hereby confirm that by majority vote of the members taken on _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ (date), Mr/Ms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , acting in his/her capacity of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, is authorised to submit this tender on behalf of the close corporation, and to sign all documents in connection with this tender and any contract that may result from it on behalf of the close corporation. A certified copy of the members’ resolution is annexed to this Form. Signed: Date: Name: Position
Certificate for partnership We, the undersigned, being the key partners in the business trading as _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ hereby authorise Mr/Ms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, acting in his/her capacity of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, to submit this tender on behalf of the partnership, and to sign all documents in connection with the tender and any contract that may result from it on behalf of the partnership. Name Address Signature Date NOTE: This certificate is required to be completed and signed by the full number of Partners necessary to commit the Partnership. Attach additional pages if more space is required. Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031
Certificate for Joint Venture We, the undersigned, are submitting this tender offer in Joint Venture and hereby authorise Mr/Ms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, an authorised signatory of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , being the lead member in the Joint Venture, to sign all documents in connection with the tender and any contract that may result from it on behalf of all the members in the Joint Venture. This authorisation is evidenced by the attached power of attorney signed by the legally authorised signatories of all the members in the Joint Venture. We attach to this Form a certified copy of the Joint Venture Agreement which incorporates a statement that all members in the Joint Venture are liable jointly and severally for the execution of the contract, a term that indicates which member will be the lead member, and terms that indicate the ratios according to which work and payment will be divided amongst the members. Name of JV member Address Authorised signature, name and capacity Lead member Member Member Member NOTE: This certificate is required to be completed and signed by all members of the joint venture. Attach additional pages if more space is required.
Certificate for sole proprietor I, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, hereby confirm that I am the sole proprietor of the business trading as _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Signed: Date: Name: Position:(Sole Proprietor) Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031
Certificate for trust I,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _._ _ _ , in my capacity as _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the board of trustees of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, hereby confirm that by resolution of the board of trustees taken on _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ (date), Mr/Ms _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , acting in his/her capacity of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _, is authorised to submit this tender on behalf of the trust and to sign all documents in connection with this tender and any contract that may result from it on behalf of the trust. A certified copy of the resolution of the board of trustees is annexed to this Form. Signed: Date: Name: Position: NOTE: The table below must also be fully completed by all tenderers in addition to the certificate that was selected and completed above. Name of tenderer: Full names of authorised signatory: Designation and capacity: Signature of authorised signatory Date of signature: Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031 ANNEXURE B ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM We are in receipt of the Invitation to Tender from Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd and the following addenda issued by Eskom: We confirm that the documentation received by us is: (Indicate by ticking the box) Correct as stated in the Invitation to Tender Content List, and that each document is complete. Or: Incorrect or incomplete for the following reasons: Cataloguing Acknowledgement: Please select the relevant statement by ticking the appropriate box below
We agree to provide the cataloguing information as described in the Invitation to Tender
We have already supplied Eskom with the cataloguing information pertaining to this Invitation to Tender in a previous contract/order [insert previous contract/order number] __________
We do not intend to provide the required cataloguing information for the reasons stated hereunder:
We are a Distributor/Importer/Agent and our Principal, being the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), is or is not [delete whichever is not applicable] in the position to supply cataloguing information for items. We attach the letter from the OEM confirming its position. Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031 Invitation to Tender No: ____________________ Name of Tenderer: ___________ _ _ Country of registration: _______________________________________ Full names of contact person: __________________________________ Contact details: Tel (landline): Cell phone: e-mail address: Name of tenderer: Full names of authorised signatory: VAT registration number Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031 CIDB Registration number (if applicable) and CIDB grade specified for the sub-contractor as may be stipulated in the Tender Data Proposed Scope of work to be done by sub-contractor Contact person Telephone number Fax number E-mail address Postal address Physical address
If you are currently registered as a vendor with Eskom, please provide your Vendor registration number with Eskom.________________
If you are currently registered as a vendor on the National Treasury’s Central Supplier Database (CSD), please provide your supplier registration number with Treasury_____________
Please note that it is not mandatory for you to be registered on National Treasury’s CSD at the time of responding to this tender. It is, however, a mandatory requirement that you be registered on CSD prior to award.
You may register online at National Treasury website on www.treasury.gov.za
If you are registered on SARS E-filing system, please provide your PIN number in order to verify your tax compliance status ___________________
If you are required to be tax compliant as per SBD 1 but are not registered on CSD (foreign suppliers) or have not provided your SARS E-filing PIN, please confirm that you have attached or will furnish a copy of a current valid tax compliance certificate as a tender returnable by contract award stage. YES NO
If sub-contracting is prescribed in the Invitation to Tender , tenderers must complete 7.1 to 7.9. Controlled Disclosure Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected] When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 of 61 File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 240-114238630 Rev 28 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date 07 April 2026 Review Date April 2031 7.1 Confirm if you intend sub-contracting YES NO 7.2 What percentage will you be sub-contracting? _____% 7.3 To whom do you intend sub-contracting? _______________________________ 7.4 Is the said sub-contractor registered on CSD? YES NO 7.5 If yes to 8.4, please provide CSD number.______________________________ 7.6 Please confirm B-BBEE level of said sub-contractor______________________ 7.7 Which designated group does the sub-contractor belong to
An EME or QSE;
An EME or QSE which is at least 51% owned by black people;
An EME or QSE which is at least 51% owned by black people who are youth;
An EME or QSE which is at least 51% owned by black people who are women;
An EME or QSE which is at least 51% owned by black people with disabilities;
An EME or QSE which is 51% owned by black people living in rural or underdeveloped areas or townships;
A cooperative which is at least 51% owned by black people;
An EME or QSE which is at least 51% owned by black people who are military veterans; or
More than one of the categories referred to in paragraphs (a) to (h). 7.8 Please confirm that you have attached your signed intention to sub-contract document. YES NO 7.9 Have you attached proof of sub-contractor’s belonging to designated group? YES NO Name of tenderer: Full names of authorised signatory
B-BBEE Minimum Level: 0
Points Allocation: 20 points
B-BBEE Details: d Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 240-114238630 Rev 28
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date 07 April 2026
Review Date April 2031
Clause Number from Standard
Tender Data
Conditions of Tender
7. Conditional discounts will not be taken into account for
evaluation purposes but will be implemented when payment is
effected.
Prices will be scored out of 80 points.
3.18 Evaluation of Specific Specific goals will be scored out of 20 points in accordance with the
Goals PPPFA.
B-BBEE Status Level of Number of points (80/20
Contributor system)
1 20
2 18
3 14
4 12
5 8
6 6
7 4
8 2
Non-compliant contributor 0
If a tenderer fails to submit evidence of its points claim for a
Specific Goal, it will not be disqualified. However, it will be
awarded 0 points for that Specific Goal.
3.19 Ranking of tenders Tenderers will be ranked by applying the preferential point scoring for
the 80/20 system. Eskom will add the score from Pricing and Specific
Goals together and rank the suppliers from the highest to the lowest.
3.20 Objective Criteria Objective criteria are applicable.
(if applicable)
The following objective criteria apply to the tender:
The Objective Criteria applicable is compliance with the Designated
Sector requirements for Local Production and Content, as the scope
of work contains designated products/goods, material, components
and parts with stipulated minimum thresholds for Local Production
and Content that must be complied with before the Contract is
awarded, or the Tenderer should obtain an exemption from the
Department of Trade, Industry and Competition.
Designated Component:
Commodity Components: Pumps
Local Content Thr
Section
Source: Annexure M - NEC.zip1.1.18 Quality Annexure P Y
1.1.20 Tax Evaluation questionnaire to determine whether a Annexure R Y
A Threshold of 70% is required to be met in order to be deemed
3.13 Functionality requirements Functionality requirements are applicable.
functionality criteria
Functionality requirements
1.1 Tenderer 70% Pump
Tenderers who do not meet the 70% threshold for functionality
3.15 Evaluation of Price Prices will be evaluated as follows
evaluation purposes but will be implemented when payment is
Prices will be scored out of 80 points.
3.18 Evaluation of Specific Specific goals will be scored out of 20 points in accordance with the
Goals PPPFA.
B-BBEE Status Level of Number of points (80/20
If a tenderer fails to submit evidence of its points claim for a
awarded 0 points for that Specific Goal.
the 80/20 system. Eskom will add the score from Pricing and Specific
Local Content Threshold: 70%
Evaluation methodology provided by SDL&I
Description
Source: Annexure Q - SDL&I Strategy.zipSupply and Delivery of Submersible Pipes at Kusile Power
Station.
Duration of the Project
Important Dates
Source: Annexure Q - SDL&I Strategy.zip (TENDER){"closingDate":"01 September 2019"}
Contact Information
Source: Annexure Q - SDL&I Strategy.zip (TENDER){"name":null,"email":null,"phone":null,"department":"Group Capital Division","address":null}
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure Q - SDL&I Strategy.zip (TENDER)Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pipes at Kusile Power
Station.
Duration of the Project
Description
Source: Annexure R - Tax Evaluation Questionnaire.zipEskom Holdings SOC Ltd Registration Number 2002/015527/00
Else: ActiveSheet.Shapes.Range(Array("Button 4")).Visible = msoTrue
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure R - Tax Evaluation Questionnaire.zip (unknown)Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd Registration Number 2002/015527/00
Else: ActiveSheet.Shapes.Range(Array("Button 4")).Visible = msoTrue
Description
Source: Annexure K - E-tendering Help Manual acknowledgement form.zipBusiness name/JV: _______________________________________________________
eTendering system is a web-based system that allows suppliers bidding for various tenders advertised on Tender Bulletin system to “upload” their tender documents. Currently the tenderers or suppliers submit tender documents at various Eskom tender offices. eTendering system replaces the manual or physical submission of tender documents at various Eskom tender offices. eTendering system in a nutshell is an electronic box where tender documents can be “dropped” or “uploaded”. Suppliers will be required to register their details before they can be granted access to the eTendering system. An OTP (one time pin) will be sent to both their cell phone and email address.
Technical Specifications
Source: Annexure K - E-tendering Help Manual acknowledgement form.zip (unknown)Business name/JV: _______________________________________________________
eTendering system is a web-based system that allows suppliers bidding for various tenders advertised on Tender Bulletin system to “upload” their tender documents. Currently the tenderers or suppliers submit tender documents at various Eskom tender offices. eTendering system replaces the manual or physical submission of tender documents at various Eskom tender offices. eTendering system in a nutshell is an electronic box where tender documents can be “dropped” or “uploaded”. Suppliers will be required to register their details before they can be granted access to the eTendering system. An OTP (one time pin) will be sent to both their cell phone and email address.
Quality Management
Source: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station.pdfManagement Specification (QM58)”
shall be complied with.
and sign Form A
(Enquiry/Contract/Quality
Requirements for QM 58 and
Iso 9001).
quality method statement
based on ISO 9001 and
specific to the scope of
work, or a document that have
defined the QMS and its
scope. The method
statement should address all
the supplier’s business
management processes to
ensure that all of Eskom’s
requirements are fully met on a
consistent basis.
signed quality policy.
copy of
quality objectives.
documented information for
Pricing Schedule
Source: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station.pdfFor e-tendering price schedule needs to be submitted in PDF.
The upload size per document is 500 megabytes and total
submission is restricted to 4 gigabytes.
and a copy in excel format. The upload size per document is √
500 megabytes and total submission is restricted to 4
gigabytes.
Controlled Disclosure
Anonymously report fraud, corruption at 0800 11 2722/ [email protected]
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with
the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom
Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
of 61
File name: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 240-114238630 Rev 28
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date 07 April 2026
Review Date April 2031
Reference Returnable From Suppliers at at
closing (Non- prior Award. required required closing. required Tender Contract
to Tender Returnable Returnable Returnable
Additional Not Applicable.
documents required
(Ecsa/
SACPCMP/CVs/
permits/licenses/
specific registration
documents
(if applicable to
scope of work)
Mandatory contractual requirements
Supporting evidence
Mandatory CSD Registration (CSD number/CSD Report) √
Contractual
meeting is mandatory/compulsory, then tenderers must attend
such meeting. Tenderers that do not attend such
mandatory/compulsory meeting will be disqualified and will not
be evaluated.
2.16 Seeking clarification The tenderer will notify Eskom of any clarifications required before the
closing time for clarification queries, which is 5 working days before
the deadline for tender submission.
2.22 Alternative tenders Alternative tenders are not allowed.
2.33 Cataloguing The successful tenderer may be required to provide the cataloguing
information per item after contract award and will need to ensure that
all materials delivered to Eskom are labelled in line with Eskom’s
labelling specifications as may be stipulated by Eskom. Where
cataloguing is a requirement, the Pricing Schedule must also include
a line item for cataloguing, which tenderers are required to quote for.
awarded 0 points for that Specific Goal.
3.19 Ranking of tenders Tenderers will be ranked by applying the preferential point scoring for
the 80/20 system. Eskom will add the score from Pricing and Specific
Equity report to the Department of Labour. (South African
tenderers only)
CIDB (where Valid proof of the required CIDB grading designation for the Not Applicable.
applicable) main contractor; JV and /or sub-contractor as may be required
in the tender data at tender closing deadline or within 21
working days from the closing date of submission of tenders
if this is agreed with the Employer
Annexure M – NEC completed. √
Nec
Annexure N – Completed pricing schedule √
Pricing schedule
Contractual Terms
Source: Invitation to Tender (ITT) - Supply and Delivery of Submersible Pumps at Kusile Power Station.pdfsanctions list. A tenderer shall be found to have the nationality
of a country if the tenderer is a national or is constituted,
incorporated, or registered and operates in conformity with the
provisions of the laws of that country. This criterion shall also
apply to the determination of the nationality of proposed
subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract including
related services.
2. Tenderers submit more than one [tender/proposal] either
individually or as a partner in a joint venture (JV) or consortium,
except on an E-Tendering system where there is a limit size
(The upload size per document is 500 megabytes and total
submission is restricted to 4 gigabytes).
a) Has to demonstrate to Eskom the process and
selection criteria applied when appointing contractors
and suppliers.
b) Has to provide notification to Eskom, prior to the
appointment of contractors or suppliers for the
commencement of work.
c) Has to ensure that contractors/ suppliers have
adequate resources and competencies.
d) Is accountable for the management of its contractors/
suppliers in order to ensure that the applicable legal
and Eskom requirements (that are applicable to the
main supplier during contract execution) are complied
with by the contractors or suppliers.
e) The main supplier shall monitor contractors or
suppliers through audits and assessments with regard
to OHS compliance during the execution of the work.
f) The grounds for the termination of work done by
contractors/suppliers shall be provided by the main
supplier.
g) All non-conformances/non-compliance by the
contractors/suppliers (all tiers) to the main supplier
shall be dealt with directly with the main
contractor/supplier in terms of performance and
penalty processes.
h) Eskom reserves the right to verify this when deemed
necessary. The contractor may be instructed to provide
copies of testimonials/references and the contact detail
of clients (including Eskom) for whom the Company
has done previous work of a similar nature
when submitting tenders and concluding contracts with Eskom:
For contracts valued below R50 000 000 (Fifty Million Rand) including VAT, Eskom is committed to
paying Suppliers within 30 days of receipt of undisputed invoices.
For contracts valued above R50 000 000 (Fifty Million Rand) including VAT, Eskom is committed to
paying suppliers within 60 days of receipt of undisputed invoices.
Relevant where environmental authorisations, EIAs or environmental compliance may apply.
Relevant because this tender appears to involve construction, building work, infrastructure, or site-based delivery.
Act 85 of 1993
Sets health and safety duties for contractors, employers and service providers working on public-sector sites.
Relevant because this tender appears to involve construction, building work, infrastructure, or site-based delivery.
Act 103 of 1977
Relevant where building standards, renovations, maintenance or construction compliance may apply.
Relevant because this tender appears to involve construction, building work, infrastructure, or site-based delivery.
Data conflicts
None detected
Get deep intelligence on Construction. Unlock full pricing strategies, bid frequency, and historical win rates.